■A  M. 


Al 

r 

Si' 

1 

■^ 

it 

mczan 

?/'.'•■%' 

/•"' 

■'.' 

*r/ 

C 

' 

5 

r 

il 

in 

/  L.  I.  PREYOST 
VETERINARY  SURGEON, 
X  MOUNTAIN  UKE  PAHK,  MQ.  / 


JOHNA.SEAVERNS 


TUFTS   UNIVERSITY   LIBRARIES 


3  9090  014  532  242 


fH^\AJrWoCHER&§ON  ^0. 
Surgecat  Instruments, 

19=23   W.  Sixth  St.  CrNCINNATI,  O, 


Webster  Family  Library  of  Veierirtary  Medicine 
Cummings  School  of  Veterinary  Medicine  at 
Tufts  University 
200  Westboro  Road 
North  Grafton,  MA  01536 


Restraint 


Domestic  Animals 


A  BOOK   FOR  THE  USE  OF 


Students  and  Practitioners 


312  Illuitrationi  from   Pen   Drawings  and 
2b   Hals  Tonts  from    Original  Photographs 


George  R.  White,  M.  D.,  D.  V.  S. 

Graduati  Columbian  University  {Veterinary  Department) ,  and  University  of  Nashville  {Medical  Department) 

Member 

American    Veterinary  Medical  Association 

Tennessee  State    Veterinary   Medical  Association 

American   Medical  Association 

Tennessee  State  Medical  Association 

Nashville  Academy  of  Medicine 

and  Davidson   County  Medical  Society 


Published  by  the  Author 


NASHVILLE,  TENNESSEE 
19  0  9 


COPYRIGHTED   1909 

BY 

George  R.  White 


PRESS  OF 

BAYLESS-PULLEN  CO. 

NASHVILLE 


Dedication 


To  W.  H.  Dalrymple,  M.  R.  C.  V.  S. 

As  a  slight  token  of  personal  friendship,  as  well  as  for  his  untiring  and  continued 

efforts  to  advance  the  status  of  the  Veterinary  Profession  in  the  South 

— especially  for  his  pioneer  work  in  the  State  of  Louisiana, 

is  this  volume  respectfully  dedicated  by 

THE  Author 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 


PAET  I. 

Restraint  of  the  Horse  in  the  Standing  Posture. 

CHArTER  I.      Twitches,  Gags  and  Barnacles. 

Chapter  II.     Restraint  or  "War  Bridles"  and  Halters. 

Chapter    III.     Restraint   Harness    and    Other   Leather    and 

Rope  Appliances. 
Chapter  IV.  Stocks. 
Chapter  V.      Slings. 

PART  II. 

Restraint  of  the  Horse  in  the  Recurnbent  Posture. 

Chapter  I.     Hobbles. 

Chapter  II.     Casting  and  Securing  Harness  and  Ropes. 

Chapter  III.      Operating  Tables. 

PART  III. 

Restraint  of  the  Ox. 

Chapter  I.     Restraint  of  the  Ox  in  the  Standing  Posture. 
Chapter  II.     Restraint  of  the  Ox  in  the  Recumbent  Posture. 

PART  lY. 

Restraint  of  the  Dog. 

Chapter  I.     Operating  Tables. 

Chapter  II.     Muzzles,  Tape  and  Other  Methods. 

PART  V. 

Restraint  of  the  Hog. 


INTRODUCTION 


Restraint  of  Domestic  Animals,  in  the  broadest  acceptation 
of  the  term,  means  much  to  the  average  busy  and  active  practi- 
tioner of  Veterinary  Surgery. 

Each  species  of  our  domestic  animals  is  endowed  with  one 
or  more  means  of  defense.  These  are  oftentimes — in  individ- 
uals of  certain  temperament — converted  into  weapons  of  offense. 
The  horse  will  strike,  kick  and  bite ;  the  ox  will  gore  and  kick ; 
the  dog  and  hog  will  bite.  It  is  with  these  weapons  of  offense 
that  we  are  called  upon  to  contend  and  overcome  by  restraint. 
These  animals  must  be  rendered  harmless  by  the  means  of  re- 
straint which  we  have  at  hand.  Of  course  the  particular  method 
employed  depends  largely  upon  the  animal  and  the  degree  of 
restraint  necessary. 

While  we  constantly  find  it  necessary  to  employ  methods  of 
restraint  in  order  to  confine  the  animal,  we  should  always  dg 
so  in  as  humane  a  manner  as  possible.  Humanitarian  treatment 
applies  here  as  well  as  elsewhere  in  the  practice  of  Veterinary 
science.  We  should  never  take  advantage  of  an  animal  when 
confined  in  order  to  cause  torture  or  to  inflict  unnecessary  pain 
of  any  kind. 

The  surgeon  is  confronted  with  problems  pertaining  to  re- 
straint or  some  method  of  subjection  almost  every  hour  of  each 
day  of  his  professional  career. 

Xot  only  does  the  restraint  problem  confront  and  concern  the 
surgeon  alone,  but  his  client  and  patient  are  also  directly  inter- 
ested to  a  well  marked  degree.  The  surgeon  owes  it  to  his 
client,  his  patient  and  himself  to  become  proficient  in  properly 
and  securely  restraining  animals  for  examination  and  operation. 
Without  efficient  means  of  restraint  the  surgeon  is  in  constant 
danger  of  great  bodily  harm;  the  animal  in  danger  of  self- 
inflicted  injuries  as  a  result  of  its  own  efforts  at  resistance, 
thereby  causing  the  owner  financial  loss  which  could  and  should 
have  been  avoided  by  proper  methods  of  procedure. 


8  INTRODUCTION. 

In  order  to  cast  and  secure  an  animal  properly  and  success- 
fiillj  the  operator  should  possess  a  level  head  associated  with 
plenty  of  courage  and  confidence.  He  should  retain  his  equili- 
brium in  spite  of  any  untoward  accident  or  emergency  which 
may  chance  to  take  place.  Self-confidence  and  good  judgment 
are  both  valuable  assets  in  performing  work  of  the  character 
which  this  book  undertakes  to  illustrate  and  describe.  The 
surgeon  should  get  control  and  remain  in  control  from  the  time 
the  twitch  is  placed  on  the  animal  preparatory  to  applying  the 
hobbles  or  casting  harness  until  the  animal  is  again  on  its  feet. 
Experience  and  dexterity  are  not  to  be  underrated  in  the  oper- 
ator who  is  to  undertake  the  task  of  securing  and  properly  con- 
fining the  larger  of  our  domestic  animals.  Do  not  allow  your- 
self to  become  excited  or  unduly  alarmed  or  aggravated  should 
everything  not  transpire  as  smoothly  as  you  expect  or  desire, 
for  in  so  doing  the  surgeon  is  not  in  possession  of  his  mental 
faculties  sufficiently  to  do  justice  either  to  himself,  his  patient 
or  his  client. 

Perfect,  or  even  good,  surgery  is  impossible  without  per- 
fect restraint.  The  surgeon  is  no  better  than  the  restraint 
method  which  he  uses.  It  is  rare  to  see  a  surgeon  handle  a  knife 
any  more  skillfully  than  he  handles  his  restraint  technique. 
Imperfect  restraint  means  an  imperfect  operation. 

This  book  contains  338  illustrations;  of  this  number  312 
are  zinc  etchings  made  from  pen  drawings,  and  26  are  half- 
tones from  original  photographs.  In  compiling  and  placing  it 
before  the  profession  of  this  country  I  have  endeavored  in  so 
far  as  possible  to  avoid  technicalities  in  order  to  make  it  valua- 
ble to  the  student  and  amateur  horseman. 

I  do  not  care  to  be  held  responsible  for  the  imperfections 
of  many  of  the  modes  of  restraint  and  subjection  illustrated  and 
described.  I  have  endeavored  to  the  best  of  my  ability  to  illus- 
trate and  describe  the  good  methods  as  well  as  those  which  are 
bad  or  even  indifferent.  Each  operator  should  select  his  favor- 
ite method — the  one  or  ones  which  most  appeal  to  his  fancy — 
and  by  practice  become  proficient  in  the  skillful  use  of  same. 

My  thanks  are  due  and  are  hereby  acknowledged  to  Professors 
A.  Liautard,  John  A.  W.  Dollar,  W.  L.  Williams,  and  L.  A. 


INTRODUCTION.  9 

Merillat  for  their  courteous  assistance  and  advice;  Mr.  J.  T. 
Jolley  for  his  painstaking  care  in  making  the  drawings,  and 
all  others  who  have  in  any  way  assisted  me  in  my  efforts  to  fur- 
nish the  profession  with  a  book  on  Restraint  of  Domestic  Ani- 
mals, which  appeals  to  me  as  in  a  manner  filling  a  long  felt 
want  in  American  veterinary  literature. 

Geoege  R.  White. 


PART  L 

Restraint  of  the  Horse  in  the 
Standing  Posture. 


CHAPTEK  I. 

TWITCHES,    GAGS    AND    BARNACLES. 


The  Twitch. 

If  every  practicing  veterinarian  in  the  civilized  world  was 
asked  to  name  the  first  and  most  important  factor  in  confining 
a  horse  in  the  standing  posture,  their  unanimous  answer  would 
be  "a  well  made  and  properly  applied  twitch."  The  twitch 
as  a  means  of  subjection  or  restraint,  is  as  ancient  as  the 
domesticated  horse  himself.  Since  its  introduction  it  has  been 
used  with  excellent  and  satisfactory  results ;  although  brutal 
in  principle,  it  is  the  veterinary  surgeon's  most  valuable  asset 
against  injury. 

It  is  almost  universally  applied  to  the  upper  lip;  however, 
in  rare  instances  it  is  placed  on  the  lower  lip  and  ear.  It  is 
applied  by  grasping  lip  through  loop  of  the  twitch,  and  is  tight- 
ened by  rotating  the  handle.  It  acts  by  squeezing  the  lip  until 
sufiicient  pain  is  produced  to  detract  the  animal's  attention  from 
the  seat  of  operation.  To  use  more  force  in  this  squeezing 
process  than  is  necessary  is  inhuman,  besides  rough  handling 
of  the  twitch  or  bearing  on  it  too  long  will  often  cause  labial 
paralysis. 

The  twitch  diverts  the  animal's  attention  by  compressing 
the  sensory  nerves  of  the  lip.  The  ordinary  rope  and  stich 
twitch,  Figure  1,  is  one  of  the  simplest  and  most  inexpensive 


Fig.    1.  Ordinary    Rope    and    Stick    Twitch. 

forms.     It  is  made  In'  simply  boring  a  round  hole   (c)   in  a 
stick  (a),  preferably  hard  wood,  about  one  inch  from  the  end. 


H 


RESTRAINT    OF    DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


When  the  hole  is  made,  insert  a  piece  of  rope  or  sash  cord  (b)  ; 
this  may  vary  in  diameter  from  !/§  to  i/o  inch,  and  in  length 
from  10  to  20  inches.  Tie  ends  of  rope  or  cord  together  and 
the  twitch  is  completed. 

Another  rope  and  stick  twitch,  Figure  2,  can  be  easily  made 

by  boring  an  oblong  hole  (e) 
^in  a  piece  of  hard  w^ood  (a) 
similar  to  that  used  in  Fig. 
1.  Use  same  diameter  and 
Fig.  2,  Ordinary  Rope  and  Stick  length  sash  cord  or  rope  (b) 
^'  ^  ■  as  is  used  in  Figure  1.     In- 

stead of  tying  ends  of  rope  together  they  are  inserted  through 
hole  (e)  on  each  side  and  are  retained  in  place  by  a  simple 
knot  on  each  end  (d)   (c). 

Ring  Ttuitch. 
The  ring  twitch,  Figure  3,  consists  of  a  metal  ring  (b)  and 


Ring  Twitch. 


Triangle  Twitch. 


TWITCHES,    GAGS    AND    BAKNACLES. 


15 


piece  of  rope  (a).  This  ring  may  vary  in  diameter  from  4  to 
6  inches.  Into  the  ring  is  tied  the  piece  of  rope  or  sash  c-^rd 
(a).  This  cord  may  vary  in  diameter  from  Ys  ^  V2  inch,  and 
in  length  from  8  to  18  inches.  This  makes  a  neat  and  liglit 
twitch,  and  one  which  can  be  folded  np  and  carried  conveniently 
ill  an  ordinary  inslrnment  grip  or  satchel. 

Triangular  Twitch. 

The  triangular  twitch,  Figure  4,  is  made  similar  to  the  ring 
twitch,  Figure  3,  except  instead  of  a  metal  ring  the  piece  of 
metal  in  shape  of  a  triangle  (b)  is  used  into  which  the  rope  or 
cord  (a)  is  tied. 

Miles'  TivitcJi. 


The  Mile^ 


Fig.  5.     Miles' 
Twitch. 


twitch.  Figure  5,  was  designed  and  first  used 
by  ^'Farmer"  Miles.  It  is  made  from  a  piece 
of  hickory  or  other  tough  and  hard  wood  18 
inches  long,  %  inch  thick,  and  2  inches  wide 
(a).  A  metal  rivet  (h)  is  inserted  near  the 
end.  An  oblong  hole  is  bored  to  carry  rope 
(e).  Another  hole  (d)  is  bored  about  3  inches 
from  the  small  end  of  stick  to  carry  strap  or 
rope  (b)  (c).  The  rope  (e)  can  vary  in 
diameter  from  l^  to  %  inches,  in  length  from 
12  to  20  inches.  Insert  ends  of  rope  through 
hole   and   retain   in  place  by   tying  knots    (f) 

Tlie  Miles  twitch,  Figiire  6,  is  applied  and 
used  in  the  ordinary  way,  with  the  exception 
that  the  twitch  stick  (e)  is  fastened  up  to  side 
of  halter  (a)  by  straps  or  ropes  (c)  (b).  Fig- 
ure G.  This  dispenses  with  holding  the  twitch 
])y  lumd.  This  is  a  convenient  as  well  as  an 
effectual  method  of  using  the  twitch. 


i6 


RESTRAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


The    rope    and    stick    twitch 


Fig.    6.      Miles'   Twitch    Applied. 


with  metal  bound  head, 
Figure  7,  is  more  sub- 
stantial than  either  of 
those  described  and  illus- 
trated above.  The  stick 
(a)  should  be  heavy  and 
strong,  size  and  shape  to 
suit  the  operator.  Spaces 
should  be  hollow^ed  out  of 
head  under  the  metal  band 
to  accommodate  rope  or 
sash  cord  (f)  (e).  A 
metal  band  (g)  (d)  is 
shrunk     around    head    of 


twitch  stick.     A  round  hole  is  bored  four  inches  from  head 
(c)  (b).     The  rope  (f)  (e)  may  vary  in  diameter  from  %  to 


Fig.  7.     Rope  and  Stfck  Twitch  Metal  Bound  Head. 

%  inch,  and  in  length  from  18  to  22  inches,  and  are  fastened 
together  at  side  of  head  of  twitch  (c). 


Ball  and  Chain  Twitch. 


Figure  8  consists  of  a 
piece  of  %  to  i/o  inch  twisted 
link  chain  10  to  12  inches 
long  attached  to  piece  of  iron 
at  one  end,  and  upon  the 
other  end  is  a  ball,  as  shown 
in  the  illustration.  This 
makes  a  good  twitch,  and  one 
easy  to  apply.  But  on  ac- 
count of  its  rigidity  it  must 
be  used  with  care  and  dis- 
cretion. 


Fig.  8.     Ball  and  Chain  Twitch. 


TWITCHES,    GAGS    AND    BARNACLES. 


17 


Another  form  of  iron  and  chain  twitch,  Figure  9,  is  strong 
and  durable.  It  is  preferred  by  some  operators,  while  by 
others  it  is  condemned.  The 
hand  piece  is  simply  a  flat 
piece  of  iron  hammered  into 
proper  shape.  After  shaping 
the  metal  two  holes  are 
drilled  through  it  to  accom- 


Fig.  9.     Iron  and  Chain  Twitch. 


modate     the     t^visted     link 

chain.  The  chain  may  be  the  same  diameter  and  length  as 
the  one  used  in  Figure  8.  This  same  pattern  of  twitch  may  be 
made  of  wood  for  handle  instead  of  metal,  and  horse-hair  rope, 
sash  cord,  or  common  rope  instead  of  chain. 


Fig.  10.     Rope  Loop  and  Short  Stick  Twitch. 


The  rope  loop 
and  short  stick 
twitch.  Figure  10, 
consists  of  a  piece  of 
rope  or  sash  cord 
varying  in  diameter 
from  Yg  to  %  inch, 
and  in  length  from 
12  to  20  inches.  The 
bends  are  tied  togeth- 
er, A  round  stick 
(a)  from  8  to  20 
inches  long  is  used 
to  complete  this 
twitch. 


The  Gag. 


The  "gag"  has  been  used  since  time  immemorial  as  a  means 
of  subjection  and  restraint.     Although  seldom  used  now  by  the 


i8 


EESTEAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Fig.   11.     Loop  and    Rope  G)ag. 


American  veterinarian,  its  use  is  continued  by  many  practi- 
tioners of  central  Europe.  Unless  used  with  extreme  caution 
lacerations  of  the  lips  and  con- 
tusions of  the  "poll"  are  liable 
to  occur.  The  gag  should  al- 
ways be  used  and  removed  as 
quickly  as  possible. 

The  loop  and  rope  gag. 
Figure  11,  consists  of  a  rope  or 
sash  cord  which  may  vary  in 
diameter  from  1/4  to  ^2  ii^ch, 
and  in  length  from  5  to  10  feet. 
To  apply  this  form  of  gag  it  is 
only  necessary  to  place  rope  in 
mouth  (a),  then  pass  looped 
end  (d)  over  poll  (c)  ;  now 
carry    rope    (b)    through    loop 

(d),  and  make  the  desired  tension  by  pulling  on  free  end  of 
rope  (b). 

Rope  and  short  stick  gag.  Figure  12,  is  made  by  tying  both 

ends  of  a  rope  together 
the  proper  size  to  fit  a 
horse,  somewhat  similar 
to  an  ordinary  bridle 
(a)  ;  then  with  a  round 
piece  of  wood  (c)  6  to 
8  inches  long,  placed 
between  rope  and  cheek, 
make  traction  by  twist- 
ing at  side  of  cheek  (b) 
until  the  desired  ten- 
sion is  obtained.  The 
diameter  of  the  rope  or  sash  cord  used  should  be  same  as  that 
described  in  Figure  11. 


Fig.  12.     Rope  and  Short  Stick  Gag. 


TWITCHES,    GAGS    AND    BARNACLES. 


19 


Fig.  13. 


Long  Stick  Gag, 


The  rope  and  long  stick 
gag,  Figure  13,  is  made  sim- 
ilar to  that  of  Figure  12  ex- 
cept the  piece  of  wood  (a) 
should  be  from  10  to  18  inches 
long.  Insert  the  stick  at  side 
of  cheek  (b)  and  twist  until  de- 
sired tension  is  obtained.  The 
free  end  of  stick  can  then  be 
tied  to  rope  (c)  at  side  of 
face. 


Barnacles. 

Barnacles  are  made  of  either  metal  or  wood.  They  con- 
sist of  two  pieces  hinged  together  at  one  end  and  so  shaped  at 
the  free  ends  as  to  make  them  easily  and  quickly  brought  to- 
gether so  that  they  can  be  "fixed"  securely  by  cord  or  other 
means.  The  barnacle  answers  the  same  purpose  as  either  the 
twitch  or  gag.  It  is  more  severe  in  its  effects,  and  should  al- 
ways be  used  with 
discretion.  The 
wooden  barnacle, 
Figure  14,  con- 
sists of  two  round 
pieces  of  hard 
wood    1 1/2    inches 

in  diameter  and  15  inches  long,  into  which  notches  or  circular 
ridges  are  cut  to  come  in  contact  with  the  lip.  These  cause 
pain  as  well  as  prevent  the  appliance  from  slipping  off  the  lip. 
They  are  hinged  at  one  end  by  means  of  a  piece  of  rope  or 
cord.  To  apply  this  barnacle  the  lip  is  grasped  and  the  free 
ends  of  the  stick  brought  together  until  desired  pressure  on 
lip  is  obtained ;  then  the  free  ends  of  sticks  are  tied  together 
with  cord. 


Fig.  14.     Wooden  Barnacle. 


EESTEAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Metal  barnacle,  Figure  15,  consists  of  two  pieces  of  metal 

with  their  approx- 
imating edges  flat- 
tened and  hinged 
together.  On  the 
distal  end  of  one 
of  these  pieces  of 


Fig.  15.     Metal   Barnacle. 


metal  a  ring  is  placed  to  fit  into  notches  on  the  corresponding 
end  of  the  other.     To  apply  this  barnacle,  Figure  16,  the  nose 


Fig.  16.     Metal  Barnacle  Applied. 

should  be  grasped  and  the  metal  pieces  forced  together  until 
the  desired  tension  is  secured.  The  ring  (c)  is  then  locked  in 
the  appropriate  notch  (a). 


Fig.  17.    Subjection  by  Grasping  Nose  and  Twisting  Ear. 


TWITCHES,    GAGS    AND    BARNACLES. 


Other  Simple  Methods  of  Subjection. 

To  liriiily  grasp  the  nose  (b)  with  the  left  hand,  Figure  lY, 
and  simply  twisting  or  compressing  the  ear  (c)  w^ith  the  right 
hand  will  oftentimes  prove  to  be  sufficient  restraint  for  exam- 
ination and  minor  operation. 


Fig.  18.     Rope  or  Cord  Held  Tightly  Around  Lower  Jaw. 

Figure  IS  represents  a  rope  or  cord   (b)   passed  into  the 
mouth  (a)  and  held  tightly  around  lower  jaw  (c).     This  will 

oftentimes  enable  the  op- 
erator to  examine  and  op- 
erate upon  many  animals 
without  resorting  to  other 
methods  of  restraint. 

To  simply  "blindfold" 
or  cover  the  head,  Fignre 
19,  will  cause  many  ner- 
vous and  sometimes  vicious 
animals  to  stand  without 
resorting  to  other  more 
complicated      or      painful 

Fig.  19.     Subjection  by  Blindfold.         methods. 


CHAPTEK  11. 

RESTRAINT    OE    "wAE    BRIDLEs"    AND    HALTERS. 


The  Restraint  or  "War  Bridle." 

As  a  means  of  restraint  and  subjection  of  animals  which 
are  of  a  certain  nervous  or  vicious  temperament,  the  "war 
bridle"  is  far  superior  to  the  twitch  or  any  other  appliance. 
This  device  has  been  in  successful  use  for  many  years  by  some 
of  the  world's  most  famous  "horse  tamers."  It  is  oftentimes 
indispensable  in  handling  certain  animals.  When  properly 
applied,  correctly  adjusted  and  judiciously  used  there  can  come 
no  bad  results  from  its  application.  When  the  nervous  and 
vicious  character  of  some  animals  is  taken  into  consideration, 
its  use  on  them,  even  from  a  humanitarian  viewpoint,  is  amply 
justified.  The  "war  bridle"  can  be  modified  in  a  variety  of 
ways  to  increase  its  power  and  efficiency.  Experience,  good 
judgment  and  extreme  care  are  the  three  attributes  necessary 
on  the  part  of  the  operator  to  handle  the  "war  bridle"  suc- 
cessfully. 

To  make  a  good  "war  bridle"  it  is  necessary  to  use  rope 
or  sash  cord  of  first-class  quality,  varying  in  size  from  5-16  to 
%-inch  in  diameter,  and  from  15  to  24  feet  in  length.  The 
object  of  the  "war  bridle"  is  to  cause  pain  by  pressure  on  the 
spinal  cord  at  its  most  exposed  part,  which  is  immediately  over 
the  axoat^loid  articulation,  at  the  same  time  tension  is  brought 
on  cheeks  at  corners  of  mouth  by  traction  on  free  end  of  cord. 
This  also  causes  excruciating  pain,  thereby  bringing  the  ani- 
mal under  immediate  and  thorough  control.  If  properly  used 
it  is  certainly  a  powerful  and  valuable  method  of  restraint. 


KESTRAINT  OR   "wAR  BRIDLEs"  AND  HALTERS. 


23 


Gleasons  "Wai^  Bridle." 
The  bridle  of 
Gleason,  Figure 
20,  is  one  of  4lie 
simplest  of  war 
bridles.  After  se- 
curing sash  cord 
or  rope  of  proper 
diameter  and 
length,  the  rope  is 
passed  around  the 
neck  (d)  and  tied 
securely  (c).  It 
is  then  passed  into 
and  through  the 
mouth   (a)    to  the 

opposite  side  and  over  the  poll  (e)  and  back  again  (f),  after 
which  the  pull  or  traction  is  made  from  end  of  rope  (b). 


Fig.  20.    Gleason's  "War  Bridle." 


Eureha  "War  Bridle. 


Fig.  21.    Eureka  "War  Bridle." 


The  Eureka  "war 
bridle,"  Figure  21,  is 
made  and  applied  by 
tying  the  rope  (g)  (f) 
around  the  neck  well 
posterior  to  the  "poll." 
Xext  pass  rope  (c)  to 
right  side  of  face  and 
through  the  mouth. 
Then  pass  rope  (a)  (b) 
back  through  loop 
around  neck  (d)  and 
make  traction  on  free 
end  of  rope  (e). 


24 


EESTKAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Fig.  22.  Bonapart  "War  Bridle." 


Bonaparte  "War  Bridle." 

The  Bonaparte  "war 
bridle,"  Figure  22,  is  one 
of  the  most  popular  and 
widely  used  "war  bridles" 
that  has  ever  been  de- 
signed. It  is  also  known 
as  the  double  draw-hitch 
bridle.  It  gives  at  least 
three  times  more  power 
than  any  other  form  of 
"war  bridle,"  and  is  es- 
pecially useful  in  handling 
and  controlling  large,  pow- 
erful and  vicious  animals.  To  make  this  appliance  the  cord 
(d)  is  tied  securely  around  neck  (c).  Then  bring  the  cord 
from  below  upwards.  ISTow  pass  it  over  poll  (e)  and  back 
through  mouth  (a)  thence  through  the  loop  (F)  and  make  trac- 
tion from  free  end  of  rope.  If  desired  to  secure  still  more 
power  the  cord  may  be  placed  under  the  upper  lip  instead  of 
though  the  mouth. 

Magners  "AYar  Bridle." 

The  Magner  "war 
*bridle,"  Figure  23, 
is  made  by  simply 
making  loop  (a) 
around  lower  jaw 
and  through  mouth, 
after  which  pass  free 
end  of  cord  upward 
on  oif-side  of  head 
and  over  "poll" 
(b)  ;  then  downward 
through  loop  (a)  and 
make  traction  from 
free  end  of  rope  (c) 


Fig.  23.    Magner's  "War  Bridjea 


RESTRAINT   OR      WAR  BRIDLES      AND  HALTERS. 


25 


Magner's  "War  Bridle"  Modified. 

Figure  24  represents 
Magner's  "war  bridle" 
modified.  This  bridle  is 
applied  by  making  a  loop 
around  lower  jaw  (a)  with 
free  end  of  rope  on  off- 
side; then  over  "poll"  (d) 
downwards  and  through 
loop  at  lower  jaw;  thence 
under  upper  lip  (e)  back 
along  side  face  on  off  side 
over  poll  again  (d)  down 
and  through  loop  (b).   Make  traction  from  free  end  of  rope  (c). 


Fig.  24.    Magner's  "War  Bridle" 
Modified 


Restraint  and  Dental  Halters. 

Devices  of  this  character  are  oftentimes  useful  in  confining 
horses  for  minor  surgical  and  dental  operations.  Inasmuch  as 
the  head  does  not  require  additional  holding,  these  halters 
dispense  with  the  services  of  at  least  one  assistant.  There  are 
several  good  and  substantial  halters  made  for  this  purpose. 
The  principal  ones  are  as  follows: 


Lucas'  Denial  Halter. 

The   Lucas   dental  halter,   Figure   25,   is   a  very   desirable 
device  for  securing  the  horse's  head  in  almost  any  position  for 

minor  surgical  operations 
and  dental  work.  It  was  de- 
signed by  George  H.  Lucas, 
Veterinary  Dentist,  of  To- 
ronto, Canada,  and  consists 
of  (a)  metal  nose  band  (a) 
hammered  into  proper  shape. 
This  nose  band  is  well  padded 
with  felt  or  other  soft  mate- 
rial.    The  nose  band  is  con- 


Fig.  25.  Lucas'  Dental   Halter, 


26 


RESTRAINT    OF    DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


nected  with  the  heavy  two-inch  overhead  or  "poll  strap"  (h) 
by  means  of  two  6-inch  doubled  and  stitched  straps  (g).  There 
are  two  side  rings  into  which  the  two  side  ropes  or  straps  (e) 
(f)  are  fastened.  These  side  ropes  or  straps  are  fastened 
securely  to  a  post  on  each  side  of  the  head  to  prevent  move- 
ment of  head  from  side  to  side.  At  bottom  of  nose  band  is  a 
ring  (c)  into  which  is  attached  the  chain  martingale  (d).  This 
martingale  is  to  fasten  into  a  strong  surcingle  and  prevent  up- 
ward motion  of  the  head.  The  Lucas  dental  halter,  when 
properly  adjusted,  will  effectually  prevent  the  head  from  move- 
ment to  either  side  or  upwards. 

FeJirs  Dental  Halter. 

Fehr's  dental  halter,  Figure  26,  is  an  effectual  device  for 
holding  the  animal's  head  steady  while  performing  minor  sur- 
gical operations  about  the 
head,  and  dental  work.     It 
is  simple  and    light,  con- 
sisting of  only  four  pieces. 
The     semi-circular     metal 
nose  band  is  covered  with 
either     rubber    tubing    or 
leather.      The  covering  is 
held    securely  to  the  nose 
band  by  metal  clamps    to 
which     are     attached    the 
suitable   rings   for   attach- 
ment of  the  heavy  over  poll  s 
strap  and  the  side  ropes  or            Fig.  26.  Fehr's  Dental  Halter. 
straps  which  are  to  secure  the  head  on  each  side  to  post  or 
sides  of  stall.    All  straps  and  ropes  are  adjustable.     The  appa- 
ratus is  readily  cleaned,  and  on  account  of  its  lightness  and 
compactness  may  be  easily  transported. 


KESTEAINT  OR      WAR  BRIDLES      AND  HALTERS. 


Ellis  Combination  Surgical  and  Dental  Halter. 

The  Ellis  combination  dental  and  surgical  halter,  Figure  27, 
is  an  appliance  for  fixing  the  head  in  certain  positions  for  minor 
surgical  operations  and  dental  work.  This 
halter  possesses  several  original  features 
which  arc  valuable  in  restraining  the  head. 
The  principal  feature  is  the  "lip  strap"  (b) 
to  which  the  jullar  or  side  reins  (g)  are  at- 
tached. These  suspend  the  head  at  the  proper 
height  and  prevent  side  to  side  movement. 
The  nose  band  (a)  is  metal,  non-compressi- 
ble and  heavilv  padded.  There  are  offsets 
in  the  nose  band  which  hold  the  cheek  pieces 
of  the  halter  21/4  to  3  inches  from  the  cheeks 
of  the  horse.  The  cheek  pieces  are  doubled 
and  very  strong.  The  "lip  strap"  is  covered 
with  rubber.  There  is  a  piece  of  forged  steel 
(c)  into  which  a  substantial  martingale  (e) 
is  snapped  (c).  The  side  reins  (g)  are  7 
feet  long  and  can  be  of  either  sash  cord, 
leather  or  chain.  The  halter  is  made  of  fine 
russet  leather,  rawhide,  and  metal  with  brass  mountings. 


Fig.  27.  Ellis  Com- 
bination Maker. 


Directions  for  Its  Application. 

After  backing  the  horse  into  his  stall  in  the  usual  manner 
for  work  upon  the  teeth,  drop  off  the  stable  halter  and  apply 
the  "combination"  halter  to  the  head,  unbuckle  the  lip-strap 
on  one  side,  pass  it  under  the  upper  lip  over  the  incisor  teeth 
and  buckle  quite  tight.  Elevate  the  head  by  fixing  the  side  or 
pillar  reins  to  the  stall-posts  on  each  side  as  high  up  as  you  can 
reach ;  then  tighten  the  strap  leading  to  the  surcingle  which  is 
provided  with  a  buckle,  thereby  lowering  the  nose  to  a  height 
convenient  to  the  operator.  If  the  stall  chances  to  be  exces- 
sively long,  place  a  rope  across  it  behind  the  horse  before  back- 
ing him  in,  for  him  to  rest  back  against,  and  he  positively  can- 
not move,  and  you  can  operate  upon  the  teeth  and  mouth  with 
an  ease  and  precision  that  is  most  satisfying. 


CHAPTER  III. 


EESTEAINT    HARNESS    AND    OTHER    LEATHER   AND    ROPE 
APPLIANCES. 

By  the  use  of  certain  appliances  made  from  leather  and 
rope  we  are  enabled  to  successfully  confine  or  restrain  one,  two, 
or  even  all  the  legs  of  a  horse  in  the  standing  posture.  The 
particular  pattern  of  apparatus  varies  according  to  the  ideas 
or  fancy  of  the  individual  surgeon  in  conjunction  with  the 
amount  and  character  of  restraint  required.  Of  course,  it  is 
understood  that  the  twitch  is  a  necessary  adjunct  to  all  of  the 
following  methods  of  restraint. 

Restraint  of  One  Foreleg. 

When  it  is  desired  to  confine  only  one 
fore  leg  it  can  best  be  done  by  use  of  some 
form  of  knee  strap.  One  of  the  best 
knee  straps  is  represented  by  Figure  28. 
This  pattern  has  been  used  by  the  author 
for  a  number  of  years.  The  straps  are 
both  two  inches  wide  and  made  from  first- 
class  harness  leather.  To  make  them 
stronger  they  are  doubled  and  stitched. 
The  smaller  strap  (b)  is  applied  between 
ankle  and  pastern.  It  is  securely  stitched 
into  blank  buckle  (d)  (e).  A  buckle  (a) 
is  inserted  two  inches  below  blank  buckle 
(d).  This  strap  is  lined  with  soft  leather 
or  lamb  skin  to  prevent  chafing.  When 
applied,  the  blank  buckle  (d)  (e)  takes 
all  the  strain  off  the  main  buckle  (a). 
On  the  opposite  side  of  the  blank  buckle 
(e)  (d)  is  applied  the  main  strap  (g) 
(h),  which  fastens  over  the  forearm  when 
Fig.  28.  Author's  Knee  ^^  ^^^^-  ^his  strap  is  adjustable  and  very 
Strap.  satisfactory  and  convenient. 


KESTKAINT    HARNESS    AND    OTHER    APPLIANCES. 


29 


The 


r 


Trashot's  Knee  Strap. 

knee  strap  designed  and  used  by  Trasbot,  Figure  29, 
consists  of  a  leather  strap  two  inches 
wide  and  four  feet  long  (d),  pierced 
with  a  sufficient  number  of  holes  to 
render  it  adjustable  to  any  size  horse. 
At  one  end  is  a  heavy  blank  buckle  (c)  ; 
on  one  side  about  ten  inches  from  the 
blank  buckle  is  a  heavy  and  strong 
buckle  (a).  The  strap  (d)  running 
through  the  buckle  (c)  forms  a  loop, 
which  is  applied  around  pastern  and 
then  wound  around  fore  arm.  It  is 
then  fastened  in  the  buckle  (a). 


I 


Fig.   29.    Trasbot's   Knee 
Strap. 


Fig.  30.     Foot  Held  by  Means  of  Rope. 


30 


RESTRAINT    OF    DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Another  method  of  holding  one  fore  foot  up,  Figure  80, 
is  to  loop  a  rope  around  pastern  and  have  it  held  over  the 
withers  (d)  by  an  assistant.  This  is  a  safe  method  to  the 
animal  on  account  of  the  rapidity  w^ith  which  the  leg  can  be 
released. 


Fig.  31.     Fixing    Pastern   to 

Forearm  With   Rope.  Fig.  32.     Hess'  Knee  Strap. 

Another  method  is  to  simply  fix  pastern  (a)  to  the  fore 
arm  (b)  as  shown  in  Figure  31.  This  is  a  simple  as  well  as 
an  inexpensive  method  of  confining  the  fore  leg. 

Hess'  Knee  Strap. 

The  Hess  knee  strap,  Figure  32,  is  made  of  a  heavy  leather 
strap  2^'2  to  3  inches  wide.  At  one  end  is  a  strong  buckle. 
About  8  inches  below  this  end  buckle  a  blank  buckle  is  placed. 
The  main  strap  is  about  36  inches  long,  and  is  applied  by 
looping  bottom  section  of  strap  around  pastern,  then  pass  the 
strap  between  pastern  and  fore  arm,  thence  around  fore  arm 
to  buckle. 


RESTRAINT    HARNESS    AND    OTHER    APPLIANCES. 


31 


Surcingle  and  strap  method,  Figure  33,  is  simply  a  surcin- 
gle   (d)    applied    tightly   around    chest.      The   strap   is   placed 


Fig.  33.     Surcingle  and  Strap. 

around  pastern  (a)  by  means  of  a  loop,  then  it  is  passed  through 
buckle  (c),  thence  upward  under  surcingle  (b),  then  down 
until  it  reaches  buckle  again. 

Resteaia^t  of  One  Hind  Leg. 

The  object  of  restraint  or  control  of  one  hind  leg  is  prin- 
cipally to  prevent  kicking.  However,  such  restraint  oftentimes 
has  the  effect  of  diverting  the  animal's  attention  and  causing  it 
to  remain  quiet  while  an  examination  is  being  made  or  a  minor 
operation  performed.  The  twitch  must  always  be  used  in  con- 
nection with  any  side  line  method.  The  hind  leg  may  be  con- 
trolled in  a  variety  of  ways.     The  principal  ones  are  as  follows : 

t 

Hock  Twitch. 


The  hock  twitch,  Figure  34,  is  for  the  pur- 
pose of  preventing  the  animal  from  flexing  the 
liock.  It  is  made  from  a  heavy  piece  of  rope  18 
to  22  inches  long,  with  a  loop  or  opening  in  each 
end  through  which  a  stick  of  wood  about  11,4 
inches  in  diameter  and  12  inches  long  is  thrust. 
This  twitch  is  placed  around  leg  from  4  to  6 
inches  above  the  hock  and  tightened  by  rotating 
the  stick  of  wood. 


g.  34. 
Twitch. 


32 


KESTEAINT    OF    DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


The  tail  can  be  utilized  in  connection  with  restraint  of  one 
hind  leg,  Figure  35.  This  is  done  by  a  special  form  of  knot 
which  will  not  slip  when  the  weight   is  thrown  on  the  tail, 


Fig.  35.     Utilization  of  Tail  in  Restraint  of 
Hind  Leg. 


Fig.  36.    Tail  Knot  for 
Hind   Leg    Rope. 


Figure  36.  After  securely  fixing  rope  (b)  to  tail  (a)  it  is 
then  passed  through  the  ring  (c)  of  hobble  strap.  The  foot  can 
be  raised  in  the  backward  position  by  making  traction  on  free 
end  of  the  rope. 

Restraining  the  hind  leg  by  sideline,  Figure  37,  is  best 
done  by  using  %-inch  cotton  rope ;  however,  manilla,  or  sisal 
rope  or  webbing  will  answer  the  purpose.  Loop  rope  around 
pastern  (a),  the  free  end  is  then  carried  under  chest  between 
fore  legs ;  then  upward  and  back  of  shoulder  on  opposite  side ; 
thence  over  back  (c)  and  down  behind  elbow  on  the  side  of  the 


RESTRAINT    HARNESS    AND    OTHER    APPLIANCES. 


33 


Fig.  37.     Restraining  One  Hind  Leg  by  Side  Line. 

leg  which  you  desire  to  restrain.  Draw  hind  leg  up  and  make 
about  two  wraps  around  the  rope  (b).  This  will  prevent  the 
ropes  from  slipping.  Hold  free  end  of  rope  (d)  with  one  or 
both  hands  (e). 


Fig.   38.      Restraining   One    Hind    Leg    by   Side   Line. 


34 


EESTKAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Another  method  of  restraining  one  hind  leg  by  side  line, 
Figure  38,  is  by  tying  the  %-inch  rope  around  the  neck  (f )  (e), 
then  pass  rope  (c)  down  to  and  around  the  pastern  (a)  which 
you  desire  to  restrain.  If  you  use  a  hobble  strap  the  rope  (c) 
is  simply  passed  through  the  ring.  Raise  foot  by  making 
traction  on  free  end  of  rope  (d).  Fix  rope  to  prevent  slipping 
by  making  one  or  two  wraps  (b). 

Restraining  one  hind  leg  by  means  of  surcingle  and  rope 
is  done  by  (Figure  39)  wrapping  rope  (b)  (d)  twice  around 
fore  legs  below  elbows,  then  fix  by  tying.  Now  bring  rope  upward 


Fig.  39.     Restraining  One  Hind  Leg  by  IVIeans  of  Surcingle  and  Rope. 

through  ring  in  surcingle  (c)  ;  then  pass  rope  downward  and 
backward  to  pastern  of  leg  which  you  desire  to  restraiu.  If 
hobble  strap  is  used  pass  rope  through  ring.  If  no  hobble  strap 
is  used  simply  wrap  the  rope  around  pastern  (e),  raise 
foot  by  making  traction  on  rope  (f). 

Merillat's  side  line.  Figure  40,  consists  of  a  hobble  strap, 
a  %-inch  rope  20  feet  long,,  and  a  special  leather  collar.  The 
rope  is  attached  to  the  bottom  of  collar  (c).  Collar  is  then  put 
on  horse,   after  which  carry  rope    (d)    down   to  and  through 


RESTRAINT    HARNESS    AND    OTHER    APPLIANCES. 


35 


hobble  ring  (f),  then  upward  (e)  through  hole  in  collar  (a)  ; 
by  making  traction  on  rope  (g)  the  foot  is  lifted  and  held  off 
the  floor.  The  advantage  of  this  method  is  that  should  the 
aninuil  lunge  or  fall,  the  leg  may  be  released  instantaneously. 


Fig.  40.     Merillat's   Single  Side   Line. 

Another  method  of  securing  the  hind  leg,  Figure  41,  is  by 
tying  rope  around  neck  with  knot  over  withers;   then  carry 


Fig.  41.     Restraining  One  Hind  Leg  in  Backward  Position. 

rope  back  to  and   around   root   of  tail ;    thence   downward  to 
pastern ;  then  back  through  hobble  ring.        Make  traction  on 


36 


KESTEAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


free  end  of  rope  and  the  foot  will  be  lifted  from  floor.  By 
this  method  the  weight  is  thrown  almost  entirely  on  the  hips 
and  back. 

The  German  method  of  restraining  one  hind  leg,  Figure  42, 
is  by  first  applying  a  heavy  leather  collar  (h)  (g).  Then  slip 
leather  strap  or  rope  loop  (d)  over  tail.  ISTow  carry  tail 
through  loop  in  crupper  strap   (e)    and  fasten  crupper  strap 


Fig.  42.     German    Method   of   Restraining    One    Hind    Leg. 


(f)  to  collar  (g).  Tie  rope  around  neck  with  knot  in  front 
of  chest  (i)  ;  then  carry  rope  between  fore  legs  to  and  through 
ring  (a)  in  hobble  strap.  Kow  carry  rope  up  to  and  through 
loop  (b)  and  make  traction  from  free  end  of  rope. 

Another  method  of  restraining  one  hind  leg.  Figure  43,  is 
by  looping  rope  or  strap  around  leg  above  ankle  (a)  ;  then  carry 
rope  or  strap  (b)  upward  to  the  opposite  side  and  around  chest 


RESTRAINT    HARNESS    AND    OTHER    APPLIANCES. 


37 


(e)   (d).     Then  twist  or  wrap  the  rope  around  the  other  rope 
(b)  behind  elbow  (c)  and  make  traction  on  free  end  of  rope  (f ). 


Fig.  43.     Restraining  One   Hind   Leg. 

To  restrain  the  leg  in  backward  position,  Figure  44,  the 
rope  is  tied  around  neck  (c)    (d)  with  knot  about  middle  of 


Fig.  44.      Restraining   Leg  in  Backward  Position. 


38 


RESTRAINT    OF    DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


shoulder  (b)  ;  then  carry  rope  (a)  downward  to  and  through 
hobble  ring  (f).  Instead  of  making  traction  forward  the  pull 
is  made  from  behind.  This  raises  foot  and  draws  it  backward. 
When  using  this  method  it  is  best  to  have  an  assistant  to 
support  the  animal. 

Another  method  of  restraining  the  hind  leg,  Figure  45,  is  to 
buckle  heavy  surcingle  (a)  around  horse;  then  loop  rope  around 
ankle  (d)  and  fix  it  there  in  such  a  manner  as  to  prevent  the 
rope  from  slipping.     Now  pass  one  free  end  (c)  through  ring 


^\x^ 


Fig.  45.     Securing  One   Hind   Leg   Forward. 

of  surcingle  (b)  on  top  of  back;  then  carry  rope  (e)  backwards 
to  and  through  tail  loop  (f).  Make  traction  on  front  rope  (j) 
to  raise  foot  and  draw  it  forward.  Then  make  traction  on 
back  rope  (g).  In  this  position  the  animal  is  unable  to  move 
the  leg  either  forward  or  backward. 


Restraint  of  Both  Hind  Legs. 

The  purpose  of  restraining  both  hind  legs  is  to  prevent  the 
animal  from  kicking.     This  method  of  restraint  is  demanded 


KESTRAINT    HARNESS    AND    OTHER   APPLIANCES. 


39 


principally  for  breeding  purposes.  Restraint  of  this  character 
will  prevent  a  mare  from  injury  to  stallion  during  service, 
besides  it  is  useful  to  the  surgeon  in  making  examinations  and 
in  performing  operations  upon  the  posterior  parts  of  an  animal. 

The  German  appa- 
ratus, Figure  46,  is  for 
the  purpose  of  prevent- 
ing kicking  by  lifting 
or  raising  both  hind 
legs  off  the  floor.  Two 
pieces  of  metal  are 
made — one  to  fit  over 
root  of  tail  (e),  the 
other  to  have  loop  near 
end  of  tail  (d).  Be- 
tween these  two  metal 
parts  are  several 
strands  of  rope  (f).  A 
heavy  strap  is  fastened 
around  each  hind  leg, 
between  the  hock  and 
stifle  (d)  (a).  By 
means  of  a  block  and 
tackle  (b)  (c)  the  hind 
quarters  are  lifted  suf- 
ficientlv  to  get  the  hind 

feet    clear    of    the    floor  ^'^-  ^^-     G^'""^^"    Apparatus   for   Lifting 

leeL    eiedr    oi    me    noor.  Hind  Legs  off  the  Floor. 


Wocher's  Service  Hohhles. 

These  hobbles.  Figure  47,  will  prevent  kicking  in  every 
instance.  They  can  be  quickly  applied  and  easily  removed. 
They  are  made  of  good  leather  and  rope  and  are  strong,  safe 
and  durable.  The  parts  are  a  heavy  leather  collar  to  the 
bottom  of  which  is  two  doubled  and  stitched  leather  straps. 
These  straps  are  punched  with  a  sufficient  number  of  buckle 


40 


EESTKAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


tongue  holes  to  render  them  thoroughly  adjustable.  To  the 
two  front  straps  are  buckled  the  connecting  rope  from  hobble 
rings. 


Fig.  47.     Wocher's   Service    Hobbies. 

The  Ewell  Farm  Service  or  Anti-Kicking  Hobbles,  Figure 
48,  are  made  by  using  a  4-inch  leather  collar  (1)  t<o  which  is 
securely  fastened  (k)  the  main  strap.  This  strap  passes  be- 
tween the  fore  legs  to  connect  with  the  main  buckle  (i).  The 
main  strap  is  2  inches  wide  and  contains  a  sufficient  number  of 
buckle  tongue  holes  to  render  it  adjustable  for  any  size  animal. 
On  each  hock  are  two  straps  (c)  (b)  fastened  at  each  end  to  a 
ring  (a).  These  two  rings  are  brought  together  and  fastened 
into  a  heavy  snap  (e)  (d).  A  1-inch  rope  (f)  running  through 
a  wooden  pulley  (g)  connects  the  two  heavy  snaps  which  carry 
hock  straps  or  hobbles.     The  main  buckle  (i)  is  fastened  to  the 


KESTRAINT    HARNESS    AND    OTHER    APrLIANCES. 


41 


pulley  (g).  By  means  of  this  arrangement  the  animal  is 
enabled  to  walk  or  move  in  almost  any  direction;  however, 
kicking  is  rendered  impossible. 


Fig.  48.     Ewell  Farm  Service  or  Anti-Kicking   Hobbles. 

The  rope  and  hobble  method  of  restraining  both  hind  legs, 
Figure  49,  is  easily  and  quickly  applied.  It  is  very  effectual 
in  prohibiting  kicking.  This  device  is  made  by  applying  a 
hobble  strap  to  each  hind  pastern  (a)  (b).  Connect  the  two 
hobble  strap  rings  by  means  of  a  rope  (c).  This  rope  is  then 
passed  upward  and  forward  between  fore  legs;  thence  upward 
on  outside  of  shoulder  on  opposite  side,  and  back  over  withers 
(f) ;  then  down  and  around  rope  (d)  behind  elbow.  The  free 
end  of  rope  (g)  is  held  by  an  assistant. 


42 


eesteaint  of  domestic  animals. 
Restraint  of  All  Four  Legs. 


We  are  called  upon  to  restrain  all  four  legs  to  prevent  kick- 
ing as  well  as  to  prevent  striking  or  pawing.  This  means  of 
restraint  oftentimes  takes  the  place  of  stocks  for  restraint  in 
the  standing  posture. 


Fig.  49.     Rope  and   Hobble   Method  of  Restraining   Both   Hind   Legs. 

Weh  and  Rope  Method. 

This  appliance,  Figure  50,.  when  used  properly,  will  effect- 
ually prevent  an  animal  from  using  either  of  its  four  legs. 
The  web  rope  should  be  made  from  either  manila  or  sisal  fiber. 
The  total  length  should  be  from  22  to  25  feet.  Begin  with  a 
heavy  ring  (c)  and  make  the  first  14  feet  of  web  (d)  4  inches 
wide.     The  next  8  to  11  feet  should  be  rope  (a)  (e)  %-inch  in 


RESTRAINT    HARNESS    AND    OTHER    APPLIANCES.  43 


Fig.  50.     Web  and  Rope  Apparatus. 


Fig.  51.     Web  and   Rope — Plate  Longe  Applied  to  all  Four  Legs. 


44 


RESTEAINT    OF    DOMESTIC    ANIMALS. 


diameter;  at  the  end  of  this  rope  is  attached  another  heavy 
ring  (b).  This  apparatus  is  applied  by  carrying  the  rope 
around  the  horse  immediately  above  hocks  and  knees.  After 
making  it  snug  and  tense  against  all  four  legs  it  is  tied  together 
at  ring  in  the  web  end;  the  rope  end  is  now  carried  over  back 
and  tied  into  web  part  on  the  opposite  side ;  then  carried  under 
abdomen  and  tied  in  the  ring  or  web  end  of  rope. 


Fig.  52.     Morgan's  Method  of  Restraining  Ail    Four   Legs. 

Figure  51  will  give  a  comprehensive  idea  of  the  proper 
way  to  apply  and  use  the  web  and  rope  apparatus  illustrated 
in  Figure  50.  This  apparatus  is  applied  by  beginning  with 
the  rope  on  near  side  of  horse  about  opposite  the  chest;  pass 
it  forward  across  the  forearm  of  that  side ;  then  in  front  below 
breast  (d)  across  forearm  of  off  side;  thence  backward  across 
thigh  (b)  well  above  hock;  then  pass  it  back  of  animal  across 
other  thigh  to  the  starting  point.     It  is  here  made  secure.     To 


EESTKAINT    HARNESS    AND    OTHER    APPLIANCES. 


45 


prevent  it  from  slipping  down  the  end  of  rope  is  thrown  over 
back  (c)  and  secured  by  a  knot. 

Morgan's  Method. 

The  Morgan  Method,  Fignre  52,  is  manipulated  by  means 
of  surcingle,  rope  and  two  hobble  straps.  The  rope  should  be 
l/o-inch  in  diameter  and  20  to  25  feet  long.  Begin  by  attach- 
ing rope  to  hobble  strap  of  near  fore  leg  (a),  pass  upward  1x) 
and  through  ring  (c)  in  surcingle;  then  backward  above  hocks 


Fig.  53.     Rope  Method  of  Restraining  All  Four  Legs. 

(g)  to  and  through  ring  in  surcingle  of  opposite  side;  thence 
down  to  hobble  ring  of  left  fore  (b)  leg.  The  rope  is  now 
carried  back  to  and  through  surcingle  ring.  Traction  sufficient 
to  prevent  kicking  is  brought  on  free  end  of  rope  (f). 

Rope  Method. 

To  apply  the  rope  method,  Figure  53,  two  %-inch  to  %-inch 
cotton,  manila  or  sisal  ropes,  each  15  feet  long,  are  necessary. 


46 


RESTRAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Loop  the  ropes  to  each  hind  pastern  (a)  (f),  or,  if  hobble  straps 
are  available,  the  ropes  are  fastened  into  the  hobble  rings.  Then 
carry  ropes  (c)  (d)  upward,  behind  elbows  (e)  (h)  ;  thence 
from  within  outward  under  the  preceding  part  of  rope  (e) 
and  upward  (g)  over  withers  (k).  The  two  ropes  are  then 
tied  together  (i),  which  completes  the  rigging. 

Galvayne  Method. 

The  Galvayne  method  of  restraining  all  four  legs  of  the 
horse,  Figure  54,  is  by  means  of  a  single  rope  of  the  proper 
size  and  length.     This  rope  is  looped  or  wrapped  around  both 


Fig.  54.     Galvayne  Method  of  Restraining  All  Four  Legs. 

hind  pasterns  (c)  ;  then  pass  rope  (b)  upward  to  and  over 
withers  (j)  ;  then  down  below  elbow  on  opposite  side;  thence 
several  times  around  both  forelegs,  at  the  same  time  taking  in 
the  main  part  of  rope  (b)  immediately  behind  the  elbow  (a). 
This  appliance  will  effectually  prohibit  kicking  and  striking. 


EESTKAINT    HARNESS    AND    OTHER    APPLIANCES. 


47 


Hippo  Lasso. 


Ej  means  of  the  Hippo  Lasso,  or  Equine  Straight  Jacket, 
nervous  and  even  vicious  animals  may  in  a  short  time  be  ren- 
dered docile  and  safe.  There  are  several  different  designs  of 
the  Hippo  Lasso ;  however,  the  result  obtained  by  use  of  either 
one  of  them  is  the  same.  To  prevent  being  kicked  the  hippo 
lasso  is  sometimes  used  preparatory  to  applying  hobbles. 


Fig.  55.     Galvayne   Method  of   Restraining  All    Four   Legs. 
(The  Galvayne  "Straight  Jacket.") 


Galvayne  s  Rope  Hippo  Lasso. 

The  rope  hippo  lasso  of  Galvayne,  Figure  55,  will  effectually 
confine  all  four  legs  of  a  horse,  in  the  standing  posture,  with  a 
single  rope.  It  is  possible  to  put  this  apparatus  on  vicious 
horses,  even  those  which  are  wild  and  unbroken.  It  can  be 
applied  without  injury  to  the  animal  or  danger  to  the  operator. 
As  a  means  of  subjection  and  restraint  this  equine  straight 
jacket  of  Galvayne  is  second  to  none. 


48 


EESTKAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Fig.  56.     Raabe's  and  Lunel's  Hippo-Lasso. 


Fig.  57.     Hippo-Lasso  Applied. 


KESTKAINT    HARNESS    AND    OTHER   APPLIANCES.  49 

Raabe's  and  LuneVs  Hippo  Lasso. 

The  hippo  lasso  of  Kaabe  and  Liinel,  Figure  56,  is  com- 
posed of  two  principal  parts,  viz. :  breast  collar  and  breeching 
strap.  These  are  joined  together  by  two  long  side  straps  (e) 
(d).  The  breeching  is  suspended  by  a  leather  strap  (g).  This 
strap  is  buckled  on  each  side  to  the  breeching  strap  (b)  (c). 
The  breast  collar  (i)  is  also  suspended  by  a  similar  strap  (h) 
and  is  attached  on  each  side  by  buckles  (j)  (k).  The  over- 
neck  strap  (h)  and  over-hip  strap  (g)  are  connected  by  an 
adjustable  back  strap  (g)   (f). 


Fig.   58.      Hippo-Lasso    in    Action. 


Figure  57  represents  the  hippo  lasso  applied.  The  breast 
strap  (b)  is  dropped  down  between  knee  and  elbow.  The 
breeching  strap  (a)  (k)  is  dropped  down  between  hock  and 
stifle.  The  breeching  and  breast  straps  are  suspended  by  over 
withers  strap  (i)  and  over  back  strap  (h). 

Figure  58  represents  the  hippo  lasso  in   action.      Tension 


50  EESTEAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 

is  being  made  on  long  side  straps  (c)   (d)  and  the  breecliing 
band  is  being  brought  firmly  against  the  hind  legs  of  the  horse. 

Belmont  Bider  Ha7"ness. 

The  Belmont  rider  harness,  Figure  59,  is  a  heavy  and  strong 
hippo  lasso.     It  is  adjustable  in  all  directions  and  affords  a 


Fig.  59.     Belmont  Rider  Harness. 

convenient  and  safe  method  of  restraining  a  horse  in  the  stand- 
ing posture. 

Gleasons  Restraint  Harness. 

The  restraint  harness,  Figure  60,  is  a  pattern  of  leather 
hippo  lasso  used  by  O.  R.  Gleason,  The  whole  apparatus  is 
made  of  leather  without  buckles.  The  breast  collar  (a)  which 
drops  down  almost  to  knees  is  8  inches  wide.  The  breeching 
strap  (b)  is  6  inches  wide  and  drops  down  almost  to  hocks.    The 


EESTRAINT    HAENESS    AND    OTHER    APPLIANCES.  51 


Fig.  60.     Gleason's  Restraint  Harness  or  Hippo^Lasso. 


withers  strap  (h)  and  hip  strap  (d)  are  connected  by  a  back 
strap  (g).  These  withers  and  hip  straps  support  the  breast  and 
breeching  straps.  Two  straps  on  each  side  run  from  breeching 
strap  to  rings  in  the  breast  strap  and  connect  these  two  parts. 
The  straps  are  all  adjustable  and  are  "fixed"  by  knots. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

STOCKS. 

With  some  operators  the  stocks  are  a  favorite  apparatus  for 
restraint  of  the  horse  in  the  standing  posture.  Other  opera- 
tors, equally  as  competent  and  experienced,  are  severe  in  their 
condemnation  of  the  stocks  as  a  means  of  restraint.  In  my 
opinion  there  are  good  reasons  for  both  of  these  conflicting 
opinions.  Some  animals  cannot  and  should  not  be  confined  in 
the  stocks ;  some  operations  cannot  and  should  not  be  attempted 
with  the  stocks  as  the  only  means  of  restraint.  Some  forms  of 
stocks  are  worse  than  worthless,  while  other  models  are  very 
desirable.  Properly  constructed  stocks  are  safe  and  sane  ad- 
juncts to  any  veterinary  operating  room.  AVe  must  all  admit 
that  accidents  to  the  operator  and  patient  do  sometimes  occur 
whenever  and  wherever  stocks  are  used ;  but  on  the  other  hand, 
we  are  forced  to  admit  that  accidents  sometimes  occur  to  the 
operator  and  the  patient  when  any  of  the  other  methods  of 
restraint  are  used.  The  knee  straj),  side  line,  hobbles,  casting 
harness  and  operating  table  all  have  their  objections,  l^one  of 
them  afford  us  perfect  means  of  restraint.  Accidents  some- 
times occur  when  using  all  or  any  one  of  them.  Admitting 
that  the  above  in  regard  to  other  means  of  restraint  is  true, 
then  how  can  any  one  be  justified  in  severely  condemning  the 
stocks.  The  stocks  afford  a  quick  and  easy  means  of  restraint. 
Without  hesitation  an  animal  is  placed  in  the  stocks ;  they  are 
labor  savers,  time  savers,  and  by  utilizing  the  stock  one  assistant 
can  successfully  confine  or  restrain  a  patient  for  many  minor 
and  even  some  major  operations. 

The  Barcus  Stochs. 

The  Barcus  stocks.  Figure  61,  is  the  product  of  an  unique 
and  original  idea  of  restraint  in  the  standing  posture.  It  is 
especially  useful  in  shoeing  and  operations  on  the  soles  of  the 
feet.  The  frame  of  this  stock  is  triangular  in  shape,  which  ren- 
ders it  exceedingly  strong.     The  two  sides  of  the  frame  (f)  (e) 


STOCKS. 


53 


are  separate  and  hinged  to  the  wall.  When  not  in  use  they 
are  open  wide  apart  and  swing  back  against  the  wall.  The  body 
girth  (g)  is  made  of  heavy  canvas  or  cotton  belting,  and  when 
tightened  by  the  ratchet  it  lifts  the  horse  partly  off  the  floor. 
This  body  girth  is  32  inches  wide.  By  means  of  the  automatic 
self-adjusting  foot  clamp  (a)  the  foot  of  any  wild,  vicious  or 
nervous  horse  can  be  grasped,  secured,  and  held  in  any  position 


Fig.  61,     Barcus  Stocks. 


with  perfect  safety  to  the  operator.  The  castings  are  all  mal- 
leable and  are  dijfficult  to  break.  In  placing  a  horse  in  this 
stock  the  head  is  tied  to  the  wall,  after  which  simply  bring 
the  two  swinging  sides  of  the  stock  together  until  they  are 
against  the  horse.  The  forward  movement  of  the  animal  is 
limited  by  a  rope  breast  band  which  fastens  by  a  cam.  Lying 
down  is  prevented  by  the  body  girth  which  is  tightened  by  a 
crank  (k).     The  apparatus  for  controlling  the  foot  consists  of 


54 


EESTEAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


a  sliding  or  lifting  bar,  on  the  lower  end  of  whicli  is  the  auto- 
matic foot  clamp.  The  sliding  bar  can  be  raised  and  locked  at 
any  desired  height  and  then  swung  either  forward  or  backward 
carrying  the  foot  with  it.  On  the  side  of  the  sliding  or  lifting 
bar  is  a  rack,  the  cogs  of  which  receive  the  locking  bolt.  It  is 
constructed  with  an  automatic  self-locking,  self-adjusting  foot 
clamp,  pivotly  connected  to  the  lower  end  of  the  sliding  bar. 
With  the  automatic  foot  clamp  the  surgeon  is  in  no  danger  of 
receiving  a  kick  while  fastening  it  to  the  foot.  This  clamp  is 
self-adjusting  and  fits  around  any  size  pastern.  The  machine 
is  provided  with  four  supporting  plates  securely  bolted  to  the 
frame  immediately  beside  each  leg  of  the  horse,  to  these 
are  locked,  absolutely  solid,  the  foot-handling  device  which  is 
constructed  in  such  a  manner  that  the  foot  can  be  instantly 
released  by  simply  raising  the  locking  pall  which  unfastens 


Fig.    62.     McKillip    Veterinary    College    Stocks. 


STOCKS.  55 

the  foot  device  and  same  can  be  as  quickly  adjusted  and  locked 
at  either  of  the  other  supporting  plates. 

McKillip   Veterinary   College  Stocks. 

The  stocks  used  at  the  McKillip  Veterinary  College,  Figure 
62,  are  strong  and  convenient.     With  them  an  animal  can  be 


Fig.   63.     McKillip   Veterinary   College   Stocks   with    Horse 
Secured — Side   View. 

properly  secured  in  the  standing  posture.  They  are  made  by 
securing  four  corner  posts  (6x8  inches)  to  both  floor  and  ceil- 
ing.    About  3  I/O  feet  from  the  floor  these  posts  are  sawed  out  to 


56  'EESTRAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 

accommodate  the  main  (3x8-incli)  side  timbers.  These  side 
timbers  are  cut  out,  both  in  front  (i)  and  behind  (e),  to  accom- 
modate the  (3x8-inch)  bars  which  are  placed  against  the  breast 
in  front  and  hips  behind.  The  girths  (f)  (g)  are  wide  and 
made  of  heavy  canvas  or  wide  belting.     The  back  straps  (h) 


Fig.  64.     McKillip  Veterinary  College  Stocks — Side  and  Rear  View. 

(i)  are  also  strong  and  made  of  the  same  material  as  that  used 
in  the  girths.  Figure  63  represents  a  side  view  of  the  stocks 
with  a  horse  secured  therein.  It  will  be  observed  that  the 
head  is  made  fast  on  each  side  to  the  front  corner  posts  of  the 
stocks.  The  two  girths  (b)  (c)  are  buckled  under  the  abdomen. 
The  two  back  straps  are  buckled  on  the  opposite  side.  These 
prevent  the  animal  from  either  lying  down  or  rearing  up,  and 


STOCKS. 


57 


^^^^^^^^^^ 


Fig.  65.    McKillip  Veterinary  College  Stocks — Rear  View. 


58 


RESTRAINT    OF    DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


the  cross  bars  prevent  forward  or  backward  movement.  All  parts 
are  well  padded  on  inside. 

Figure  64  represents  the  rear  and  side  view  of  the  McKillip 
stocks.  It  will  be  observed  that  the  cross  bar  behind  the  horse 
can  be  removed  and  the  animal  backed  against  the  cross  bar  (s) 
on  outside  of  rear  corner  posts.  This  places  the  posterior  parts 
of  the  animal  in  an  accessible  position  for  examination  and 
operation.  The  last  mentioned  position  is  especially  conve- 
nient for  all  tail,  rectal  and  vaginal  operations. 

Figure  65  represents  rear  view  of  the  McKillip  stocks  and 
is  self-explanatory.  One  advantage  the  McKillip  stock  has 
over  many  others  is  that  by  removing  the  three  cross  bars  an 
animal  may  be  led  through  the  stock  and  back  again,  thereby 
dispensing  with  the  troublesome  practice  of  "backing  them"  in. 


Fig.  66.     Ordinary  Wooden  Stock. 


STOCKS. 


59 


Another  advantage  is  that  there  is  no  obstruction  between  the 
operator  and  the  legs  and  feet  of  the  animal. 

Ordinary  Wooden  Stocks. 

Figure  66  represents  an  ordinary  wooden  stock.  It  is  made 
bv  fastening  four  corner  posts  (Gx6  inches)  securely  to  the 
floor  (a)  (b)  (h).  The  wooden  timbers  (i)  (j)  (k)  (1)  (m) 
(n)  are  firmly  nailed  or  bolted  to  the  corner  posts.  The  horse 
is  led  into  the  stocks  and  the  halter  rein  fastened  to  one  of  the 
four  corner  posts  (o).  A  rope  from  the  floor  ring  (d)  is  carried 
over  withers  (e)  and  back  across  to  bottom  of  opposite  post  (c) 
and  there  secured. 


s:idL 


Fig.  67.     Vinsot's  Stocks. 

E.  Vinsofs  Stocks. 


The  apparatus  designed  and  used  by  E.  Vinsot,  Figure  67, 
is  so  arranged  that  the  animal  may,  after  being  confined  therein. 


6o 


EESTKAINT    OF    DOMESTIC    ANIMALS. 


be  operated  upon  either  in  the  standing  or  recumbent  posture. 
The  corner  posts  on  one  side  are  hinged  at  their  bottom.  By  this 
hinge  arrangement  the  stocks  are  turned  down  to  almost  the 
horizontal  position. 

The  frame  of  this  stock  is  made  of  metal  and  equipped  with 
a  body  girth  (a)  similar  to  that  of  the  ordinary  sling.  Thi? 
body  girth  is  suspended  by  chains  (c)  (b),  which  are  attached 
to  the  iron  beam  above.  Traction  on  these  chains  is  made  by 
a  ratchet  windlass  (q)  which  at  the  same  time  tightens  the  chain 
to  which  the  hobble  rings  (e)  (m)  (n)  (o)  are  attached.  The 
horizontal  bar  (i)  is  removable  in  order  to  place  the  animal  in 
the  stock.  The  head  is  fixed  on  each  side  to  the  front  upright 
corner  posts.  A  leather  strap  (g)  is  attached  to  the  body  girth 
and  passes  between  the  hind  legs  and  fastens  into  chain  above  to 


Fig.   68.    Peuch   and   Toussaint's   Stocks. 


STOCKS. 


6l 


62 


RESTRAINT    OF    DO]\rESTIC    ANIMALS. 


STOCKS.  63 

support  the  hind  quarters.  The  Vinsot  stock  is  the  beginning 
of  the  John  A,  W.  Dollar  operating  table.  The  Dollar  table 
has  during  recent  years  been  improved  and  perfected  by  the 
Bradwood  Manufacturing  Company,  and  is  now  known  and  sold 
in  America  as  the  Bradwood  Humane  Equine  Operating  Table. 
These  tables  are  illustrated  and  described  in  Part  II,  Chap- 
ter III. 

Peuch  and  Toussaint's  Stocks. 

The  stocks  described  by  Peuch  and  Toussaint,  Figure  68, 
are  satisfactory  in  many  respects.  The  cut  is  self-explanatory. 
It  will  be  observed  that  these  stocks  are  built  upon  a  strong 
wooden  floor,  which  renders  them  portable.  They  are  easily 
moved  to  any  desired  place  in  the  hospital  or  operating  room. 

New  York  State  Veterinary  College  Metal  Stocks. 

Figures  69  and  70  will  give  the  surgeon  a  good  general  idea 
of  the  metal  stocks  now  in  use  at  the  New  York  State  Veteri- 
nary College.  These  stocks  were  designed  and  perfected  by 
Prof.  W.  L.  Williams  and  were  manufactured  and  installed 
under  his  supervision.  They  are  strong,  neat,  attractive  and 
satisfactory.  They  are  as  near  sanitary  as  it  is  possible  for 
stocks  to  be  made.  By  using  this  form  of  stocks  almost  every 
part  of  the  animal  is  accessible.  The  unique  and  original 
method  of  applying  the  girths  and  back  strap  is  especially 
attractive.  These  stocks  are  made  almost  entirely  of  tubular 
steel  of  a  large  and  strong  size.  The  steel  tubing  is  joined 
together  by  elbows  and  threaded  connections.  These  tight  and 
strong   joints  make   the   apparatus   rigid    and   substantial. 

Australian  "Crush." 

The  Australian  "Crush,"  Figure  71,  is  simply  a  "pen"  or 
"chute"  into  which  wild  and  vicious  horses  are  driven  in  order 
to  catch  them.  It  is  made  high  enough  to  prevent  the  animal 
from  jumping  out,  and  narrow  enough  to  make  it  impossible 
for  him  to  turn  around.  An  outfit  of  this  kind  is  particularly 
convenient  where  a  large  number  of  unbroken  "range  horses" 
are  to  be  caught  and  handled. 


64 


RESTRAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


CHAPTER  V. 

Slings. 

Slings  are  useful  appliances  for  restraint  in  the  standing 
posture.  The  stock  is  often  supplanted  by  a  good  strong  sling 
in  conjunction  with  some  one  of  the  several  methods  of  re- 
straining one  or  more  legs.  By  means  of  the  sling  the  animal's 
body  is  supported.  If  the  head  is  held  properly  it  is  impossible 
for  the  animal  to  turn  from  side  to  side  or  to  move  either  back- 
ward or  forward. 


Fig.  72.      H.  &  D.  Sling. 


66  EESTEAINT    OF    DOMESTIC    ANIMALS. 

H.  &  D.  Sling. 

The  H.  &  D.  sling  represented  in  Figure  72  is  made  with 
a  heavy  sail  canvas  body  girth  (a)  to  which  is  attached  the 
breeching  straps  (g)  and  breast  harness  (f).  This  canvas  body 
girth  is  supported  by  and  attached  to  a  whiffletree  (n).    A  block 


Fig.  73.     An  American  Sling. 

and  tackle  is  attached  to  the  whiffletree  in  its  center  by  means 
of  a  hook.  By  this  block  and  tackle  (o)  (p)  sufficient  tension 
can  be  made  on  the  body  girth  to  support  the  animal. 

Figure  73  represents  an  American  sling  which  is  similar  in 


SLINGS. 


67 


most  respects  to  that  shown  in  Figure  72.  The  main  difference 
is  that  the  breeching  (k)  and  breast  harness  (b)  are  padded 
or  lined  with  soft  leather  or  canvas.  This  makes  them  wider 
and  less  liable  to  chafe  the  animal. 

The  sling  represented  in  Figure  74  is  made  extra  heavy 
witli  wide  canvas  body  girth.     The  breeching  and  breast  har- 


Fig.  74.     Sling  for  Large  Horses. 


ness  are  wide  canvas  and  are  leather  bound.  It  is  made  heavy 
and  large  throughout  for  use  on  large  animals.  The  body  girth 
(a)  is  three-ply  canvas  3  feet  long,  bound  and  stitched,  with 
2-inch  leather.  Breeching  (c)  and  breast  collar  (b)  are  8 
inches  wide  and  made  of  leather,  covered  with  canvas  and  lined 
throughout  with  lambskin.  The  straps  are  supplied  with  heavy 
snaps.     The  breeching  and  breast  collar  straps  are  connected 


68 


RESTRAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


to  center  of  whiffletree  by  means  of  IV^-inch  leather  straps  with 
snaps  on  each  end.  ^ 

The  German  sling,  Figure  75,  is  in  several  respects  similar 
to  those  of  Figure  73  and  Figure  74.     The, body  belt  (a)   is 


Fig.  75.     German  Sling. 

to  theholKl/f  .?"""*  ''""'''■•  ^"•"P^-     They  are  attached 
to  the  body  belt,  both  anterior  (1)   and  posterior  (m).     Five 


SLINGS. 


69 


heavy  straps  (d)  (c)  merge  together  at  the  whiffletree  and  con- 
nect the  body  with  the  whiffletree.  An  iron  or  wooden  bar  (e) 
runs  lengthwise  of  the  horse.  By  this  bar  the  tail  (j)  and  head 
(f)  are  supported. 


Fig.  76.     Marsch's   Sling. 


Marsch's  sling,  Figure  76,  is  similar  to  those  illustrated  and 
described  above,  except  that  the  body  (a)  is  connected  with  the 
wooden  or  iron  supporting  piece  (j)  by  means  of  a  rope  lace. 
This  makes  the  sling  body  adjustable,  which  is  an  advantage  in 
some  instances. 


70 


EESTKAINT    OF    DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


The  Frencli  sling,  Figure  77,  is  neat  and  light.  The  body 
belt  (a)  is  made  of  canvas.  The  breeching  (n)  (m)  and  breast 
harness  (g)  (j)  (h)  are  web.    Four  iron  rods  (r)  (s)  (q)  (p), 


Fig.  77.     French  Sling. 


one  from  each  corner  of  body  belt,  merge  together  and  fasten 
into  a  ring  to  which  the  block  and  tackle  is  attached.  The  sling 
body  is  attached  in  front  (i)  to  a  martingale  strap.  This  strap 
prevents  the  sling  from  slipping  backward. 


PART  II. 

Restraint  of  the  Horse  in  the 
Recumbent  Posture 


PART  11. 

Restraint  of  the  Hoese  in  the  Recumbent  Posture. 

"When  deciding  whether  or  not  it  is  necessary  to  cast  and 
secure  a  horse  for  operation  or  other  purpose,  the  surgeon  should 
carefully  consider  the  temperament,  the  physical  condition  ot"  tLe 
animal,  the  length  of  time  restraint  will  be  required,  the  pain- 
fulness  and  character  of  the  operation,  the  part  or  organ  to  be 
invaded,  and  last,  but  by  no  means  least,  the  physical  ability 
and  qualification  of  the  operator.  As  a  general  proposition  it  is 
always  advisable  to  cast  and  secure  animals  for  painful  or  long 
continued  major  surgical  operations.  Kervous,  highly  bred  and 
vicious  animals  should  be  cast  and  securely  confined.  When  it 
has  been  decided  to  cast  the  animal  we  should,  first  of  all,  care- 
fully survey  the  surroundings  and  select  the  most  satisfactory 
location.  Of  course  circumstances  and  existing  conditions  play 
an  important  role  in  making  our  selection.  When  the  weather 
will  permit  the  operation  being  performed  out  of  doors,  there 
is  no  place  better  adapted  than  an  open  field  or  la^vn.  It  is 
here  that  we  have  ample  room  to  manipulate  our  restraint 
technique  without  interruption.  When  we  have  selected  the 
location  the  next  problem  which  confronts  us  is  the  "casting 
bed."  The  ideal  operating  mat  or  mattress  is  a  plot  of  green 
grass  grown  upon  smooth  ground.  Always  avoid  the  manure 
heap  or  the  "rotten  straw  pile"  whenever  possible.  They  are 
both  hotbeds  of  all  forms  of  bacterial  growth  and  are  directly 
responsible  for  many  cases  of  fatal  septic  infections.  If  we  are 
forced  to  cast  an  animal  inside  of  doors,  then  we  must  make 
the  best  of  our  misfortune  and  get  busy  in  devising  means  and 
methods  to  best  overcome  that  handicap.  Select  the  place — be 
it  hallway,  stall  or  operating  room — where  the  most  room  is 
available.  Then  a  proper  bed  must  be  prepared.  This  may  be 
done  by  the  use  of  tanbark,  soft  wood  shavings,  straw,  hay,  excel- 
sior, sawdust,  etc.,  or  a  specially  constructed  mattress  or  pad 
may  be  used.  The  next  proposition  which  confronts  us  is  what 
particular  form  of  hobble  or  casting  harness  it  is  advisable  to 


74  EESTRAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 

use  in  this  particular  case.  We  have  the  hobble,  casting  har- 
ness, and  the  equine  operating  table  from  which  to  make  our 
selection.  Each  have  their  disadvantages  as  well  as  their  ad- 
vantages. The  method  selected  or  employed  must  depend  large- 
ly upon  the  circumstances  and  surroundings  encountered  in  each 
individual  case.  The  temperament,  size,  strength,  age  and 
conformation  of  the  animal  must  each  receive  due  considera- 
tion. Then  the  location  of  the  field  of  operation,  the  length 
of  time  required  to  operate,  number  and  ability  of  assistants, 
value  of  the  animal,  and  means  of  restraint  available  are  all 
to  be  considered.  To  avoid  rupture  or  dislocation  of  important 
internal  abdominal  organs  it  is  best  to  prepare  the  patient  before 
casting.  This  is  done  by  withholding  water  and  food  for  from 
twelve  to  twenty-four  hours.  When  we  once  undertake  the 
task  of  casting  and  confining  the  animal  it  should  be  completed 
with  dispatch.  Do  it  quickly,  avoid  accident  unless  same  is 
unavoidable,  and,  above  all  things  else  for  the  personal  safety 
and  protection  of  the  operator  and  the  welfare  of  the  animal, 
the  restrain  should  be  secure.  The  dangers  encountered  in 
jDerforming  work  of  this  character  are  legion.  The  operator  is 
often  kicked,  struck  or  bitten  while  applying  and  adjusting  the 
casting  apparatus.  The  animal  may  receive  halter  burns,  lacer- 
ations and  abrasions  of  different  kinds.  Rupture  of  muscles 
and  tendons  sometimes  take  place.  Fractures  of  the  vertebrae 
and  other  bones  are  by  no  means  infrequent.  Some  patients 
present  radial  paralysis  as  a  sequela  of  casting,  while  others 
become  exhausted  and  never  rise  after  being  released. 

There  are  three  useful  adjuncts  to  casting  and  securing 
animals  which  it  is  well  to  mention  at  this  immediate  juncture, 
viz.,  the  operating  hood,  the  apparatus  of  Bemardot  and  Buttel 
for  preventing  broken  back,  and  the  cross  hobbles. 

The  Operating  Hood. 

The  operating  hood,  Figure  78,  is  made  of  heavy  canvas, 
doubled,  stitched  and  padded,  after  which  the  hood  (a)  is 
bound  around  the  edges  with  either  leather  or  heavy  cloth. 
Openings  are  made  at  top  (d)  to  accommodate  the  ears.  It  is 
held  on  by  buckles  under  chin  and  jaw  (b)    (c).     This  hood 


RESTRAINT  OF  THE  HORSE  IN  RECUMBENT  POSTURE. 


75 


Fig.  78.    Operating   Hood. 

protects  tlie  head  from  injury  and  at  the  same  time  it  acts  as 
a  means  of  subjection  bv  answering  the  purpose  of  a  blindfold. 


"  1 


Fig.  79.     Bernardot  and  Buttel  Apparatus  for  the  Prevention  of 
Broken  Back. 

Bernardot  and  Buttel  Apparatus. 

The  Bernardot  and  Buttel  apparatus,  Figure  79,  is  for  the 
purpose  of  protecting  the  spinal   column  from   injury  while 


76 


RESTRAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


casting  and  confining  an  animal.  This  appliance  was  invented 
and  used  by  E.  Cooper  Smith,  M.  R,  C.  V.  S.  By  the  use  of 
this  appliance  "broken  backs"  can  often  be  avoided.  The  main 
object  of  this  apparatus  is  to  hold  the  head  in  an  extended 
position.  This  appliance  consists  of  a  wide  and  strong  surcin- 
gle (u).  On  the  end  of  this  surcingle  are  two  leather  straps 
(x)  (y)  to  fasten  into  the  buckles  (w).  On  each  side  of  this 
surcingle  are  two  straps  (v)  (b)  which  join  together  in  front 
(s)   (t).     A  strong  halter  is  placed  on  the  horse.     This  halter 


Fig.  80. 


Bernardot  and  Buttel  Apparatus  for  Preventing  Broi<en 
Back — Applied. 


is  supplied  with  a  heavy  over-check  attached  to  the  nose-band 
(h).  This  over-check  passes  in  front  of  the  face  and  forehead, 
between  the  ears,  and  attaches  to  a  metal  ring  (y).  To  this 
metal  ring  has  already  been  attached  the  two  straps  (s)  (y) 
from  the  martingale.  By  lengthening  or  shortening  the  over- 
check  strap  (q)  the  head  is  placed  in  the  desired  position.  The 
surcingle  is  prevented  from  slipping  forward  by  a  strong  crup- 
per and  strap.  The  apparatus  is  applied  loosely  before  the 
animal  is  cast,  and  tightened  after  it  is  on  the  ground. 

Figure  80  shows  the  Bernardot  and  Buttel  outfit  applied. 
It  will  be  observed  that  the  head  and  neck  are  well  extended, 
thereby  lessening  the  liability  to  back  injury. 


RESTRAINT  OF  THE  HORSE  IN  RECUMBENT  POSTURE. 


77 


Ci'oss  Hobbles. 

In  securing  the  animal  in  special  positions  we  are  called 
upon  to  use  various  appliances.     Some  of  the  arrangements  for 

this  purpose  are  the 
cross  hobbles  and  the 
side-bar     hobbles. 
These  hobbles  are  for 
use  on  the  thigh  and 
fore  arm.     The  Eng- 
lish    cross     hobbles, 
Figure  81,  and  those  of  James,  Figure  82,  can  be  used  upon 
legs  diametrically  opposite,  such  as  the  near  hind  and  off  fore 
legs,  and  vice  versa.     "While  the  side-bar  hobbles,  Figmre  83, 


Fig.  81.     English   Cross    Hobbies. 


Fig.  82.     James'   Cross    Hobbles. 

are  for  use  on  opposite  legs  only.  The  illustrations.  Figures 
81,  82  and  83,  are  self-explanatory.  Suffice  it  to  say  that  these 
appliances  are  useful  and  valuable  adjuncts  to  restraint  in  the 


Fig.  83.     Side-bar  Hobbles. 


recumbent  posture.  They  should  be  used  whenever  the  hobbles 
or  casting  harness  fail  in  themselves  to  sufficiently  immobilize 
the  legs  for  operation. 


CHAPTEK  I. 
Hobbles. 

The  advent  of  hobbles  as  a  means  of  restraint  in  veterinary 
practice  marked  an  epoch  of  beginning  advancement  in  veteri- 
nary operative  technique.  The  hobbles,  as  a  means  of  re- 
straint, have  the  advantage  over  any  other  method  in  so  far 
as  they  are  light,  portable,  strong  and  convenient.  They  can 
be  quickly  applied,  the  animal  cast  and  secured,  with  few 
assistants  and  little  ceremony.  An  animal  can  also  be  released 
promptly  and  allowed  to  regain  its  feet.  The  disadvantages 
of  hobbles  are  the  impossibility  of  securely  restraining  the 
patient,  liability  of  accident  to  patient,  and  inability  to  fix  the 
legs  in  special  positions  for  operations  where  position  plays  an 
important  role.  There  are  numerous  styles  and  kinds  of  hob- 
bles; some  are  of  course  better  and  more  satisfactory  than 
others.  In  making  a  selection  be  sure  and  not  make  the  mis- 
take of  sacrificing  strength  for  appearance.  Be  sure  the  hobbles 
you  use  are  well  made  and  strong.  The  application  of  hobbles 
should  always  be  preceded  by  the  twitch.  An  operating  hood 
or  some  other  head  protector  should  be  applied  before  the 
hobbles  are  brought  into  action.  There  are  numerous  styles 
and  kinds  of  hobble  straps.  They  are  made  of  leather,  rope, 
metal,  rawhide,  webbing,  etc. 

Figure  84  represents  the  improvised 
rope  hobbles  of  Denenbourg.  These  are 
made  by  taking  four  heavy  metal  rings  and 
four  pieces  of  l/2"iiich  rope.  Fix  the  rings 
with  the  rope  by  passing  it  several  times 
around  each  pastern.  For  the  forelegs  the 
ring  should  be  placed  behind  the  pastern, 
and  for  the  hind  ones  the  rings  should  be 
in  front  of  the  pasterns.  If  metal  rings 
cannot  be  procured,  loops  may  be  made  on 

each  end  of  the  cord,  through  which  the 
Improvised  Rope  Hob-  ,  ^     .  °  . 

ble  of  Denenbourg.     castmg  rope  or  cham  can  pass.     Hj  usmg 


HOBBLES. 


79 


a  casting  rope  or  chain  the  animal  is  cast  and  secured  in  the 
ordinary  manner. 

Figure  85  represents  Suykcrbuyck's  rope  hobbles.  Each 
hobble  is  made  by  braiding  several  cords  together,  or  by  a 
single  rope  or  sash  cord  not  less  than  %  of  an  inch  in  diameter, 
folded  upon  itself.      These  are  tied  together  in  a  simple  knot 


Fig.  85.     Suykcrbuyck's   Rope   Hobbles. 


(a).  A  ring  (e)  is  fastened  in  the  loop  formed  by  the  folding 
of  the  ropes,  and  secured  by  wrapping  or  tying  ropes  together 
by  means  of  a  "waxed  end,"  or  strong  string  (d).  The  hobble 
is  then  placed  around  pastern  as  shown  in  the  illustrations  on 
the  left.  A  casting  rope  or  chain  completes  the  outfit.  To  re- 
move this  hobble  the  tension  on  same  must  first  be  released ; 
this  is  done  by  bringing  the  legs  together. 


8o 


EESTEAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Fig.  86.    Miles'  Rope  Loop  Hobble. 


Figure  86  represents  the  Miles  rope  hobble.        It  consists 
of  a  piece  of  %-inch  rope  35  inches  long  and  a  "D"  metal 

ring  (a).  In  the  center 
of  the  rope  (b)  is  looped 
the  metal  "D"  ring.  The 
ends  of  the  rope  (d)  (e) 
are  fastened  together  (c). 
These  hobbles  are  applied 
by  simply  looping  them 
around  each  pastern.  It 
will  be  observed  that  when 
the  34-inch  rope  is  doubled  it  makes  a  hobble  only  17  inches 
in  length. 

Figure  87  represents  practically 
the  same  hobble  strap  as  that 
shown  in  Figure  86.  The  "D" 
ring  (a)  is  attached  to  the  plaited 
rawhide  rope  (d)  by  means  of  a 
leather  strap  (e).  A  piece  of 
leather  (c)  is  applied  to  the  raw- 
hide hobble.  This  leather  strap  is 
to  grasp  with  the  hand  in  order 
to  render  its  removal  by  unloop- 
ing  more  convenient. 


Fig.  87. 


Plaited  Raw-hide  Hob- 
ble   Strap. 


Figure  88  represents  a  heavy  and  strong  leather  loop  hob- 
ble.    The  strap  (e)  is  doubled  and  stitched.     It  is  17  inches 

long  and  2  inches  wide,  fas- 
tened at  each  end  by  three 
rivets  into  a  metal  clasp  (c) 
(d).  These  metal  clasps  also 
carry  two  blank  buckles  (a) 
(c).  It  will  be  observed  that 
these  blank  buckles  are  so 
sized  that  one  will  pass  con- 
veniently through  the  other  by  turning  it  cornerwise,  which 
prevents  them  from  becoming  unlooped  and  dropping  off  the 
pastern. 


Fig.  88.     Leather  Loop   Hobble. 


HOBBLES. 


8i 


Figure  89  represents  Becker's  liobtle  strap.     The  Becker 
hobble  strap  consists  of  a  leather  strap  3  inches  wide,  doubled 

and  stitched.  ISTear  one 
end  of  this  strap  is  the 
metal  receptacle  (A) 
for  the  spring  lock  pin 
(e)  which  holds  the  dis- 
engaging buckle  (c). 
^  The  hobble  "D"  (b)  is 
attached  near  the  above- 
mentioned  receptacle. 
The  free  end  of  this 
hobble  strap  (d)  is  per- 
forated with  a  number 


Becker's  Hobbles. 


Fig.  90.    Over's  Spring    Hobble. 

of  holes  to  accommodate  the  buckle  (c).     The  inside  of  this 
hobble  strap  is  lined  or  padded  with  felt  or  lamb's  wool.     The 


82  BESTHAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 

buckle    (c)    of  the  hobble  is   disengaged  by  withdrawing  the 
spring  pin  (e). 

Figure  90  represents  Over's  spring  hobble.  It  consists  of 
a  piece  of  flat  spring  steel  (a)  21/^  inches  wide,  and  shaped  to 
fit  around  the  pastern.  The  hobble  "D"  or  rings  (c)  (b)  are 
attached  to  each  end  of  the  spring  strap.  The  special  advan- 
tage of  this  spring  hobble  of  Over  is  that  it  can  be  readily 
slipped  over  the  pastern,  and  when  once  applied  the  spring 
feature  makes  it  self-retaining.  There  is  no  looping  or  buck- 
ling required,  and  the  movements  of  the  animal  will  not  cause 
it  to  drop  off. 

DiKECTIONS     FOK     CaSTING     AND     CoNFINING     A     HoKSE     WITH 

Hobbles. 

First. — Select  a  suitable  place  and  prepare  a  soft  bed  for 
casting. 

Second. — Place  the  animal  in  propor  position. 

Third. — Apply  the  twitch. 

Fourtli. — Apply  the  operating  hood. 

Fifth. — Apply  the  hobbles. 

Sixth. — Detail  assistants  to  their  proper  positions  and  in- 
struct them  to  obey  orders. 

Seventh. — Cast  the  animal. 

Eighth. — Secure   the   animal. 

There  should  be  one  assistant  at  the  head ;  he  should  have 
charge  of  the  twitch  and  halter  rein.  Two  or  more  assistants 
should  pull  the  main  rope,  strap  or  chain.  The  operator  should 
stand  directly  behind  the  animal  with  a  firm  tail  hold.  As  soon 
as  everything  is  in  readiness  the  command  should  be  given,  at 
which  time  sufiicient  traction  is  made  on  the  main  rope  to  draw 
the  feet  from  under  the  animal.  The  success  of  the  job  depends 
largely  upon  the  way  the  tail  hold  is  manipulated.  At  the 
proper  time  the  operator  should,  by  pulling  tail  either  to  the 
right  or  left,  unbalance  the  animal,  and  just  before  it  comes  in 
contact  with  the  ground  lift  up  on  the  tail.  This  will  take 
much  of  the  jar  or  concussion  off  the  hind  quarters  and  reduce 
chances  of  injury  to  a  minimum. 


HOBBLES.  83 

DiEECTIONS  FOR  RELEASING  AN   AnIMAL  FeOM   HoBBLES. 

It  requires  some  care  and  quite  as  much  time  to  release  an 
animal  from  the  hobbles  as  is  required  in  the  casting  and  re- 
straining process.  If  the  horse  is  in  the  dorsal  position  it 
should  be  placed  on  its  side.  If  the  main  hobble  rope,  strap  or 
chain  has  been  "fixed"  while  restraining,  the  same  should  now 
be   "un-fixed"    and   withdrawn   from   the   hobble   rings.      The 


Fig.  91.  James'  Patent  Hobbles. 

operator  should  stand  back  well  out  of  reach  of  the  feet,  how- 
ever facing  them,  and  carefully  remove  the  hobble  straps  from 
each  pastern  and  allow  them  to  drop  off.  ISTow  remove  the  hood, 
and  lastly  the  twitch,  after  which  allow  the  animal  to  rise. 

James'  Patent  Hobbles. 

^Figure    91    represents   the   hobbles    introduced   by   James. 
They  are  light  and  neat  as  well  as  sufficiently  strong.     They 


84 


EESTKAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


consist  of  four  pieces  of  %-inch  rope  double  and  fixed  over  a 
grooved  piece  of  metal  through  which  the  main  rope  (j)  glides. 
These  hobble  ropes  (b)  (e)  (f)  (g)  are  made  in  form  of  loops 
and  are  covered  with  leather  or  rubber  hose  to  prevent  chafing. 
They  are  each  17  inches  long.  The  main  rope  (j)  is  fixed  to  one 
of  the  hobble  rings  (i)  by  means  of  wrapping  with  a  "waxed 
end"  or  strong  cord  (a).  This  rope  is  passed  through  all  the 
hobble  rings  (b)  (c)  (d)  and  back  to  the  point  of  beginning 
(i).  The  main  rope  (j)  is  18  feet  long  and  %  inches  in  diam- 
eter, preferably  cotton. 

BarnicVs  Loop  Hobbles. 

Figure  92  repre- 
sents the  loop  hob- 
bles of  Barnick. 
They  consist  of 
four  hobble  straps 
(b)  made  of 
leather  in  the  form 
of  a  loop.  Each  of 
these  are  attached 
to  a  "D"  metal 
ring  (a)  (e)  (f) 
(g)  of  special  de- 
sign through  which 
,  the  main  rope  (c) 
passes.  The  leather 
straps  are  felt 
lined.  These  "D" 
rings  open  up  and 
allow  removal  of 
main  rope  without 
removal  of  the  hob- 
ble from  pastern. 
They  are  locked  on 
by  means  of  a 
metal  key.  The 
main  rope  is  attached  securely  to  an  end  ring  (a)  ;  this  ring  is 


Fig.  92.    Barnick's  Hobbles. 


HOBBLES. 


8S 


also  attached  to  ring  of  master  hobble  strap.  That  part  of  rope 
upon  which  the  hobble  strap  rings  glide  is  leather  covered  to 
prevent  wear.  This  rope  should  be  18  feet  long  and  %  to  % 
inches  in  diameter. 

Munich  Hohhles. 

Figure  93  represents  the  Munich  hobbles.  They  are  similar 
in  many  respects  to  the  improved  English  hobbles.  They  con- 
sist of  four  hobble  straps  (a)  (b)  (c)  (d),  which  are  applied 
by  buckling  around  pasterns.      These  straps  are    felt  or  soft 


Fig.  93.     Munich    Hobbles, 

leather  lined,  and  each  of  them  carry  a  "D"  metal  ring  (h) 
(g)  (e).  The  wearing  end  of  the  main  rope  is  leather  covered 
and  attached  to  the  "D"  ring  of  master  hobble  (h).  This  rope 
may  be  attached  by  loop  (g),  as  shown  in  the  small  illustration. 
Attachment  to  master  hobble  ring  by  the  latter  method  makes 
the  main  rope  (i)  easy  to  remove. 

Matthias'  Hohhles  With  Safety  Loch. 

Figure  94  represents  the  hobbles  of  Matthias.  These  hob- 
bles are  supplied  with  safety  lock  (d).  They  consist  of  four 
heavy  doubled  and  stitched  hobble  straps,  felt  or  soft  leather 


86 


EESTEAINT   OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


lined,  and  are  attached  to  hobble  ring  (c)  by  means  of  a  loop 
(b).  They  attach  to  pastern  by  buckling.  The  hobble  rings 
are  metal  and  heavy,  and  of  a  special  design.     The  ring  (c) 


Fig.  94.    Matthias'    Hobbles   with   Safety   Lock. 

of  the  master  hobble  is  attached  to  the  main  chain  (e)  by  a 
safety  lock  (d).  The  safety  lock  makes  their  removal  con- 
venient. 

Conkey's  Self-Locking  Buckle  Hohhles. 

Figure  95  represents  the  self -locking  buckle  hobbles  of 
Conkey.  These  hobbles  were  designed  by  Professer  L.  L.  Con- 
key  and  are  now  very  extensively  used  by  veterinarians  through- 
out the  world.  The  principle  and  most  attractive  feature  of 
this  hobble  is  the  self -locking  buckle  device  (e).  These  hobbles 
consist  of  four  double  and  stitched  hobble  straps  (a)  (b)  (c) 
(g).  These  hobble  straps  fasten  around  the  pasterns  by  means 
of  strong  buckles.  In  three  of  these  straps  is  a  metal  "D," 
which  carries  the  main  hobble  chain  (f).  This  chain  itself 
is  4  feet  long  and  is  continued  by  6  feet  of  %-inch  rope.  The 
object  of  this  chain  is  to  lock  in  the  flat  split  spring-tongue  of 
the  buckle  (e)  which  is  attached  to  the  master  hobble  strap 
(g).  One  end  of  the  chain  is  also  attached  by  means  of  a  thumb 
screw  (d)  to  this  master  hobble.  To  release  the  animal  this 
thumb  screw  (d)  is  removed.     The  Conkey  master  hobble  strap, 


HOBBLES. 


87 


Fig.   95.     Conkey's   Self-Locking    Buckie    Hobbles. 


lock  buckle,  and  chain  can  be  used  with  many  designs  of  hobble 
straps.  The  following  illustrated  hobble  straps  can  be  used  in 
conjunction  with  the  Conkey  lock-buckle:  Figures  84,  85,  86, 
87,  88,  89,  90,  91,  92,  93,  94;  also  the  hobble  straps  from  the 
English  and  Berlin  hobbles. 


Fig.  96.    Berlin  Hobbles. 


88 


KESTRAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Berlin  Hobbles. 

The  Berlin  hobbles,  Eigiire  96,  consist  of  four  leather  hob- 
ble straps  2  inches  wide,  doubled  and  stitched.  Each  of  these 
straps  (b)  carry  a  buckle  and  a  metal  "D,"  through  which  the 
main  hobble  rope  (g)  (h)  passes.  The  hobble  straps  are  lined 
with  felt  or  soft  leather  and  are  attached  around  pasterns  by 
buckling.     To  the  master  hobble  is  attached  a  strong  chain  (e). 


Fig.  97.    Berlin   Hobbies  Applied. 


This  chain  is  4  feet  long.  At  its  end  a  %-inch  rope  (g)  is 
attached.  The  part  of  the  rope  which  comes  in  contact  with 
the  "D"  of  the  hobble  strap  is  covered  Avith  leather.  This 
leather  covering  prevents  wear  on  rope.  The  Berlin  hobbles 
applied  is  shown  in  Figure  97.  A  hobble  strap  is  placed  on 
each  pastern.  The  king  hobble  strap  is  to  be  placed  on  near 
fore  leg  (a).     The  rope  is  carried  from  the  near  fore  to  the 


HOBBLES. 


near  hind  leg  (f )  ;  then  across  to  off  hind  leg  (e)  ;  thence  to  off 
fore  leg  (b)  and  back  through  "D"  ring  of  near  fore  (a).  For 
further  instructions,  see  directions  for  casting  and  securing  a 
horse,  with  hobbles. 


Fig.   98.    Casting   witin    Berlin    Hobbies   and    Plate-longe. 

Figure  98  illustrates  the  Berlin  hobbles  applied  and  used 
in  connection  with  the  plate-longe  or  "unbalancing  strap," 
applied  by  a  loop  over  the  near  elbow\  By  use  of  plate-longe 
the  animal  can  be  cast  upon  a  mat  or  mattress. 


Stuttgart  Method. 

In  casting  and  restraining  a  horse  by  the  Stuttgart  method 
(old  style).  Figure  99,  two  ropes  %-inch  in  diameter  and  18 
feet  long  are  necessary.  A  loop  is  placed  in  one  end  of  each 
rope.     If  it  is  desired  to  cast  horse  on  near  side  one  rope  is 


90 


EESTEAINT   OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


looped  around  near  fore  pastern  (d)  ;  an  ordinary  hobble  strap 
is  placed  around  near  hind  pastern  (b).  On  the  off  side  the 
rope  is  looped  around  off  hind  pastern  (c)  and  the  hobble  strap 
is  placed  on  off  fore  pastern.  The  rope  from  the  near  side  is 
then  passed  through  the  hobble  ring  on  the  off  hind  pastern. 
The  end  of  the  other  rope  is  then  passed  through  the  hobble 
ring  on  the  off  fore  pastern.     The  ropes  are  now  crossed,  the 


Fig.   99.     Stuttgart    Hobbles    (old   style). 


one  from  the  near  leg  to  remain  under  the  one  from  the  off  leg. 
Two  men  should  pull  on  the  same  rope  backwards  and  two 
pull  on  the  other  rope  forwards.  One  assistant  should  be  in 
charge  of  the  head  and  another  in  charge  of  the  tail.  When  the 
horse  is  cast  it  can  be  secured  in  the  ordinary  manner  in  several 
desirable  positions. 

Figure  100  represents  the  Stuttgart  hobbles  with  surcingle 
(k)   applied.     The  surcingle  is  for  the  purpose  of  aiding  in 


HOBBLES. 


91 


Fig.  100.    Stuttgart  Method  of  Casting  a  Horse. 


Fig.    101.    Stuttgart   Hobbles   Showing   Plate-longe   or   Unbalancin£ 

Rope    in    Use. 


92 


EESTEAINT    OF    DOMESTIC    ANIMALS. 


Fig.  102.    Stuttgart  Method  of  Casting  a  Horse  as  Modified  by 
Von  Cheicliowski. 


securing  after  horse   is   cast.      Otherwise   hobble  arrangement 
is  the  same  as  that  of  Figure  99. 

Figure  101  represents  Stuttgart  hobble,  surcingle   (i)   and 
plate-longe  or  "unbalancing  strap"  (h)  applied,  ready  for  cast- 


ing. 


Figure  102  represents  the  Stuttgart  hobbles  as  modified  by- 
Yon  Chelchowski.  It  will  be  observed  that  the  hobble  and  rope 
arrangement  here  is  the  same  as  that  of  Figures  99,  100  and 
101,  with  the  exception  of  the  free  end  of  the  off  rope  (e), 
which  passes  from  ofp  hind  pastern  to  and  through  "D"  ring 
(f )  on  surcingle.  When  the  horse  is  cast  the  off  hind  and  near 
forefoot  are  drawn  near  "D"  ring  of  surcingle,  as  shown  in 
Figure  103. 


HOBBLES. 


93 


Fig.  103.    Horse  Cast  and  Secured  with  Stuttgart  Hobbles. 

English  Hobbles  Improved. 

Figure  104  represents  the  improved  English  hobbles.  These 
hobbles  are  probably  more  universally  used  than  any  yet  de- 
vised. They  consist  of  four  hobble  straps  (h)  (i)  (f)  (g),  a 
chain,  and  a  rope.  The  hobble  straps  are  heavy  and  strong, 
being  3  inches  wide  and  doubled  and  stitched.  They  are  in  two 
sections ;  one  section  carries  a  small  metal  "D"  at  one  end  and 


Fig.  104.    Improved   English    Hobbles. 


94  EESTKAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 

buckle  tongue  holes  at  the  other  end.  The  other  section  carries 
a  large  metal  ^'D"  at  on  end  and  a  heavy  buckle  at  the  other  end. 
The  hobble  strap  is  made  smaller  or  larger  by  the  buckle.  This 
renders  it  adjustable  to  any  size  pastern.  When  once  fitted  to 
the  pastern  the  hobble  strap  is  applied  by  slipping  the  small  "D" 
of  one  end  through  the  large  '^D"  of  the  other  end.  These 
smaller  "D's"  carrv  the  main  chain.     The  main  chain  is  4  feet 


Fig.  105.    Improved   English    Hobbles  Applied, 

long  and  attached  to  small  ''D"  of  the  master  hobble  strap  by 
means  of  a  thumb  screw.  To  the  other  end  of  chain  a  %-inch 
rope  20  feet  long  is  attached. 

Figure  105  shows  the  hobbles  applied.  It  will  be  observed 
that  if  the  horse  is  to  be  cast  on  the  off  side  the  master  hobble 
is  applied  to  pastern  of  near  fore  leg  (a).  Then  pass  chain 
(E)  and  rope  (H)  through  "D"  of  near  hind  leg  (B)  ;  then 
across  to  "D"  of  off  hind  leg  (c)  ;  thence  forward  (G)  to  off  fore 


HOBBLES. 


95 


Fig.   106.     Horse    Ready  to  Cast  with    Improved    English    Hobbles   and 
Plate-longe  or  "Unbalancing  Strap"  Around   Forearm. 


Fig.  107.    The  English   Hobbles  Applied,  Together  with  Bernardot  and 

Buttel's  Apparatus;  Also  Plate-longe  or  Unbalancing  Strap 

Around    Fore   Arm. 


96 


BESTKAINT   OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


leg  (D)  ;  then  across  to  and  through  "D"  of  near  fore  leg.  To 
cast  the  horse  traction  is  made  on  free  end  of  rope  (F).  See 
directions  for  casting  a  horse  with  hobbles. 

Figure  106  represents  a  horse  ready  to  be  cast  with  im- 
proved English  hobbles,  and  plate-longe  or  "unbalancing  strap" 
applied  to  near  fore  arm. 

Figure  107  represents  a  horse  ready  to  be  cast  with  the  im- 
proved English  hobbles,  used  in  connection  with  Bernardot  and 


Fig.   108.    Trasbot's   Method   of  Casting   with   Three   Hobble  Straps  and 
Knee    Strap    (English    Hobble). 


Buttel's  apparatus  for  preventing  broken  back,  and  the  plate- 
longe  or  "unbalancing  strap"  applied  around  off  fore  arm. 

Figure  108  represents  the  method  suggested  by  Trasbot  for 
casting  nervous  or  vicious  animals  with  the  English  hobbles.  It 
will  be  observed  that  the  near  forefoot  is  secured  by  Trasbot's 
knee  strap  (g).  (See  Knee  Straps,  Figure  29.)  Only  three 
hobble  straps  are  used  (g)  (b)  (f).  The  master  hobble  strap 
(c)  is  placed  on  near  hind  pastern;  then  pass  chain  (d)  to  off 


HOBBLES. 


97 


fore  (f)  ;  thence  backward  (c)  to  off  hind;  then  across  to  and 
through  "D"  of  the  master  hobble  strap  (g).  The  plate-longe 
is  looped  around  the  animal  (h).  Traction  is  made  on  free  end 
of  main  rope  (e).  It  is  claimed  by  Trasbot  that  an  animal  thus 
cast  struggles  less  than  when  cast  by  the  ordinary  method. 

"Farmer"  Miles'  Method  of  Casting  a  Colt. 

Figure  109  represents  the  Miles  colt  hobbles  applied  (first 
position).     The  hobbles  of  Miles  consist  of  four  hobble  ropes. 


Fig.    109.     Miles'   Colt    Hobbles  Applied — First    Position. 


These  are  of  the  loop  variety.  The  material  used  in  making 
the  loops  may  be  either  rawhide  (plaited),  Figure  87;  leather, 
Figure  88,  or  rope.  Figure  86.  These  hobbles  are  each  from  15 
to  18  inches  long  and  are  applied  by  looping.  The  main  rope 
is  %-inch,  cotton,  and  18  feet  long.  Upon  one  end  is  a  2-inch 
metal  "D."     This  main  rope  is  also  used  as  the  master  hobble. 


98 


RESTEAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Fig.  110.    Miles'  Colt  Hobbles  (Second  Position). 

It  will  be  observed  that  there  is  one  hobble  rope  on  each  hind 
pastern,  and  two  hobble  ropes  on  off  fore  leg — one  around  pas- 
tern and  the  other  below  the  knee.  The  main  rope  is  applied 
around  pastern  of  foreleg  (a).  It  is  now  passed  across  through 
hobble  ring  on  near  fore  pastern  (b)  ;  then  backward  to  near 
hind  (d)  ;  thence  across  to  off  hind  (e)  and  back  to  hobble  ring 
(c)  below  near  knee.  The  object  of  this  arrangement  of  the 
ropes  (two  hobbles  on  near  fore  leg)  is  that  when  traction  is 
made  on  free  end  of  main  rope  (f)  the  near  fore  foot  is  raised 
or  lifted  off  the  ground.  This  in  itself  unbalances  an  animal 
and  puts  it  to  a  decided  disadvantage,  besides  by  lifting  the  near 
fore  foot  the  animal  will  go  down  on  the  shoulder  of  that  side 
and  will  in  all  probability  receive  an  easy  fall.     The  animal 


Fig.  111.    Miles'   Method  of  Securing  a  Colt    (Third  Position). 


HOBBLES.  99 

is  cast  as  illustrated  in  Figure  110  (second  position),  and  se- 
cured by  taking  two  or  more  half  hitches  with  the  main  rope 
around  uppermost  hind  pastern.  This  is  done  by  an  assistant. 
The  oj^erator  stands  opposite  the  assistant  and  behind  the  ani- 
mal and  is  handed  the  main  rope  (g)  by  the  assistant  (after 
it  is  fixed  about  upper  hind  pastern).  The  rope  is  carried  over 
the  loins  and  under  the  horse ;  thence  to  the  lower  hind  pastern. 
Now  by  rolling  horse  on  his  back,  Figure  111  (third  position), 
and  making  do"\^Tiward  pressure  on  the  hind  feet,  at  the  same 
time  drawing  the  rope  tight  by  upward  pull  the  hocks  are  flexed 
and  all  four  feet  brought  down  close  to  the  abdomen. 

The  Miles  method  affords  us  a  light,  portable,  strong,  con- 
venient, safe,  and  in  every  respect  an  efiicient  and  satisfactory 
means  of  casting  and  securing  the  colt  or  even  the  horse.  The 
colt  is  held  balanced  in  the  dorsal  position  by  an  assistant  on 
each  side. 

Secueing  the  Hoese  in  Special  Positions  when  Cast  with 

Hobbles. 

Oftentimes  after  an  animal  is  cast  it  becomes  necessary  to 
release  one  or  more  feet  in  order  to  re-secure  them  in  some 
other  or  different  position.  By  so  doing,  parts  are  rendered 
more  accessible  for  operations  of  different  kinds  and  in  different 
locations,  besides  the  restraint  oftentimes  is  more  perfect  and 
secure.  Upon  the  subject  of  "Special  Positions,"  Moller,  Liau- 
tard  and  Dollar  have  each  contributed  interesting  as  well  as 
valuable  descriptions.  They  are  at  the  present  time  our  best 
authorities  on  this  important  subject. 

To  restrain  an  animal  in  a  special  position  after  being  cast 
with  any  of  the  ordinary  hobbles,  we  may  use  either  leather 
or  rawhide  straps,  rope — preferably  cotton  rope  on  account  of 
its  softness  and  flexibility,  or  webbing.  Moller's  method  of 
securing  the  legs  to  a  board  is  useful  in  many  instances.  The 
board  should  be  l^/o  inches  thick  and  5  inches  wide.  It  should 
be  well  padded  and  supplied  with  a  curved  iron  handle.  The 
cross  hobbles,  Figures  81  and  82,  and  cross  bar  hobbles,  Figure 
83,  are  very  useful  in  retaining  the  legs  in  special  positions. 


loO  EESTHAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 

Figure  112  represents  the  near  fore  arm  (e)  secured  to  the 
near  thigh  (j)  by  means  of  webbing.  The  off  fore  leg  (a)  is 
released  from  the  hobble  strap  and  fixed  to  the  board  (b)  by 
wrapping  with  a  web  strap  according  to  Moller's  method.  The 
near  fore  leg  and  both  hind  legs  remain  in  the  hobble  straps  (f). 


Fig.  112.    Near  Fore  Arm  Secured  to  Near  Thigh  and  Off  Fore  Leg  to 

Board    (IVIoller). 

Figure  113  represents  the  near  hind  leg  secured  to  the  near 
fore  arm  by  means  of  the  web  strap.  The  off  hind  leg  is  re- 
leased from  the  hobble  strap  and  fixed  to  board  (b)  by  means 
of  another  web  strap  (c). 


Fig.   113.    Securing   Off   Hind   Leg  to   Plank  and'  Near   Fore  and    Near 
Hind    Legs  to   Each    Other    (IVloller). 


HOBBLES. 


Figure  114  represents  Dollar's  method  of  fixing  the  hind  leg 
by  drawing  it  forward.  The  off  hind  leg  is  released  from  the 
hobble  strap  and  the  webbing  applied  by  looping  around  pastern. 
The  webbing  (c)  is  carried  over  the  withers,  beneath  the  neck, 
over  front  of  chest,  over  the  fore  arm   (d),  and  thence  back- 


Fig.  114.     Dollar's  Method  of  Drawing  the  Hind  Leg  Forward. 

ward  (b)  from  below,  upwards  back  of  the  tendon  Achilles. 
Make  sufficient  traction  on  free  end  of  web  strap  (e)  to  draw 
the  leg  in  position  sho^^^l  in  Figure  115.  It  will  be  observed 
that  the  off  hind  leg  is  well  extended  by  tension  above  hock  (a) 
and  that  the  foot  (c)  is  securely  fixed  behind  the  elbow. 


Fig.  115.    Hind  Leg  Drawn  Forward  Ready  for  Operation   (Dollar). 


EESTEAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Fig.   116.     Berlin    IVlethod  of   Drawing  tlie   Hind    Leg   Forward. 


Another  method  of  securing  a  horse  in  this  position  is  by 
the  Berlin  method,  shown  in  Figure  IIG, 

Still  another  method  of  extending  and  drawing  the  hind  leg 
forward  is  that  of  Liautard,  Figure  117.    The  webbing  is  looped 


Fig.   117.    Liautard's   Method   of   Drawing  the    Hind    Leg    Forward. 


HOBBLES. 


103 


above  the  ankle  (b),  tben  carried  forward  over  the  withers 
(c)  under  the  neck,  across  the  chest,  over  shoulder  (d)  and 
back  to  and  under  hind  leg  above  hock  (f).  Extend  the  leg  by 
making  traction  on  free  end  of  rope  (g). 

Dollar's  method  of  securing  the  hind  leg  to  the  fore  leg  on 
the  same  side,  Figure  118,  is  by  releasing  the  hind  leg  from 


Fig.  118.    Dollar's   Method  of  Securing  the   Hind   Leg  to  the   Fore  Leg 
on  the  Same  Side. 


the  hobble  strap ;  then  loop  the  webbing  around  leg  above  the 
hock  (e)  ;  pass  it  forward  between  fore  legs  near  the  breast  (d)  ; 
thence  under  the  shoulder  to  opposite  side,  where  it  is  held  by 
an  assistant.  The  hind  and  fore  legs  are  at  this  time  crossed  be- 
low the  knee  of  one  and  below  the  hock  of  the  other.  They  are 
to  be  held  together  in  this  position  by  another  piece  of  webbing 
forming  figure  "8." 

Liautard's  method  of  securing  the  hind  leg  to  the  fore  leg 
on  the  same  side.  Figure  119,  is  by  allowing  all  four  legs  to 
remain  in  the  hobble  straps.  Loop  the  plate-longe  or  web  strap 
around  the  fore  leg  below  the  knee ;  from  there  it  is  carried 


I04 


EESTEAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Fig.  119.    Liautard's  Method  of  Securing  the  Hind  Leg  to  the  Fore  Leg 
on  the  Same  Side. 


9  ^ 


Fig.  120.     Dollar's    IVlethod  of  Securing  the   Lower  Hind  to  the   Upper 

Fore    Leg. 


HOBBLES. 


105 


backward  to,  and  from  above,  downward  around  hind  leg  above 
hock;  thence  forward  to  elbow;  then  around  fore  arm.  Make 
traction  from  free  end  of  the  rope. 

Figure  120  represents  Dollar's  method  of  securing  the  lower 
hind  to  the  upper  fore  leg.  The  lower  hind  leg  is  released  from 
the  hobble  strap.  The  plate-longe  or  webbing  is  looped  around 
the  leg  above  the  hock.  It  is  then  carried  forward  between  the 
fore  legs,  in  front  of  the  breast,  under  the  neck  and  out  on  the 
opposite  side,  in  which  position  it  is  held  by  an  assistant.  The 
legs  are  secured  where  they  cross  (f )  by  means  of  another  strap. 
To  make  it  more  stationary  and  secure  a  hock  twitch  may  be 


Fig.  121.     Liautard  Method  of  Securing  Off  Fore  to  Off  Hind  Leg. 


applied  around  both  hocks  (b).  To  fix  the  near  fore  to  near  hind 
leg,  Figure  121,  it  is  necessary  to  loop  the  plate-longe  or  web- 
bing around  at  the  middle  third  of  the  metacarpal  region.  Then 
the  leg  is  drawn  up  and  placed  across  the  hind  leg  above  hock. 
They  are  secured  here  by  tying  in  shape  of  figure  "8." 

Figure  122  represents  the  Berlin  method  of  restraining  a 
horse  in  the  dorsal  position  after  casting.  The  hind  and  fore 
leg  of  each  side  must  be  fixed  together  (b)  (d),  this  is  done  with 
either  webbing,  rope  or  leather.  With  a  running  noose  in  the 
end  of  strap  a  loop  is  made  around  hind  fetlock;  then  by  two 


io6 


RESTRAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Fig.   122.    Berlin   Method   of   Restraining  an   Animal    in   the   Dorsal 

Position. 


or  more  half  hitches  the  hind  fetlock  and  fore  fetlock  are  fas- 
tened together.  The  animal  is  now  rolled  on  to  its  back.  If 
more  restraint  is  desired  it  may  be  readily  obtained  by  looping 
a  strap  or  rope  just  above  the  fetlock  on  near  side;  then  carry 
it  downward  under  the  back  thence  upward  to  fetlock  of  off  side. 


Fig.  123.   Vienna  Method  of  Restraining  a  Horse  in  the  Dorsal  Position. 


HOBBLES. 


107 


The  legs  and  feet  can  now  be  drawn  down  close  to  the  abdomen, 
which  affords  ample  restraint. 

Figure  123  represents  the  method  used  in  Vienna  for  re- 
straining a  horse  in  the  dorsal  position.  It  is  similar  in  all  re- 
spects to  the  Berlin  method,  Figure  122,  with  the  exception  that 


Fig.  124.     Pulley  and  Short  Chain  for  Holding  Hoi"ses  on  the  Back 
(English  Hobbles). 


a  broad  back  strap  (a)  is  used  instead  of  the  webbing  or  rope. 
This  back  strap  (a)  is  8  to  10  inches  wide  and  made  of  leather. 
In  each  end  is  a  large  metal  triangle.  To  apply  this  back  strap 
(a)  the  horse  is  lifted  by  the  tail  until  the  back  strap  can  be 
slipped  under.    Then  by  webbing  or  leather  straps  around  and 


lo8  RESTEAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 

above  the  fetlocks  (b)  and  through  the  end  triangles  the  legs  can 
be  drawn  down  against  the  abdomen  to  the  desired  position. 

Figure  124  represents  another  method  of  restraint  in  the 
dorsal  position.  The  animal  is  cast  and  secured  with  English 
hobbles,  then  by  means  of  a  short  chain  and  pulley  the  animal 
is  raised  to  and  held  in  the  dorsal  position.  It  is  possible  for 
only  two  men  to  confine  a  large  and  strong  animal  by  this 
method. 

For  another  method  of  securing  an  animal  in  the  dorsal 
position,  see  Figure  111. 


CHAPTER  11. 
Casting  and  Securing  Harness  and  Ropes. 

Casting  and  restraining  the  horse  by  use  of  harness,  ropes 
or  other  methods — aside  from  hobbles  and  operating  tables — 
will  surely  test  the  skill  and  dexterity  of  the  surgeon  in  the  effi- 
ciency of  his  restraint  technique.  It  is  by  means  of  the 
various  designs  of  securing  harness  and  ropes  that  most  of  the 
"special  positions"  of  the  animal  are  obtained.  Special  posi- 
tions are  necessary  in  order  to  perform  certain  surgical  opera- 
tions. 

Restraint  by  use  of  casting  harness  and  ropes  means  re- 
'straint  in  its  broadest  sense.  With  these  special  appliances  we 
are  enabled  to  render  the  animal  absolutely  motionless  and  at 
the  same  time  harmless.  When  thus  properly  restrained  the  ani- 
mal is  entirely  at  our  mercy,  and  we  can  with  safety  and  con- 
fidence proceed  with  whatever  operation  we  wish  to  undertake. 

Casting  and  securing  harness,  and  rope  methods,  vary  much 
in  their  "make-up."  They  not  only  vary  in  different  countries 
but  in  different  sections  of  the  same  country.  The  original  de- 
signs are  constantly  being  modified  by  different  practitioners. 

Knots  Used  in  Rest"raint  for  Fixing  the  Various  Ropes, 
Cords  and  Straps. 

In  order  to  properly  fix  or  secure  ropes, 
cords  or  straps,  the  surgeon  should  know 
the  formation  of  the  different  varieties  of 
knots  used  for  this  purpose. 

Figure  125  represents  the  Gramy  knot. 
The  formation  of  this  knot  is  somewhat 
Fig  125.   The  Gramy      tedious  and  complicated ;   how^ever,  when 
Knot.  once  formed  or  applied  it  will  not  slip. 


RESTRAINT    OF    DOMESTIC    ANIMALS. 


Figure  126  illustrates  the  double 
hitch  or  "Clove  hitch"  knot.  This 
knot  is  made  by  forming  two  loops 
and  throwing  them  together.  This  is 
one  of  the  principal  knots  used  in 
recumbent  restraint  with  casting  har- 
ness and  ropes.  The  half  hitch  knot 
so  often  mentioned  and  used  is  sim- 
ply a  part  of  this  double  hitdi  knot 
and  is  very  simple  in  its  formation. 

Figure  127  represents  the  true 
lovers'  knot.     This  is  a  knot  which 
is  simj)le  in  its  formation;  however, 
on  account  of  its  liability  to  slip  or 
become  untied,  it  is  of  doubtful  value  in  restraint  technique. 


Fig.  126.  Double  Hitch  Knot. 


Fig.  127.   True  Lovers'  Knot. 


>^.'^'■■^^^^.^sv^'^^'.■■,^^^.v.^ ;.  1. 1.  k  ■.  k,k  ■  .~^ 


' 'i  'I'l'iji 


Fig.  128.    Slip  Bow  Knot. 


Figure  128  represents  the  slip  bow  knot.  This  knot  is 
easily  and  quickly  made  and  can  be  conveniently  untied  by 
makino'  traction  on  one  of  its  free  ends. 


Fig.  129.    Slip  Knot  or  Loop. 


CASTING   AND   SECUKING   HARNESS  AND  ROPES.  Ill 

Figure  129  represents  the  slip  knot  or  loop.  This  loop  is 
very  extensively  used  in  restraint  work.  So  long  as  traction 
is  made  on  the  free  end  of  this  loop  there  is  no  liability  of  its 
slipping.  Besides  the  above,  there  are  ring  knots,  stopping 
knots,  surgeon's  knot,  etc. 


Hock  Twitch. 

After  the  animal  is  cast  and  restrained  by  most  of  the  cast- 
ing harness  and  rope  methods  it  oftentimes  becomes  necessary 

to  supplement  this  restraint  by 
applying  the  hock  twitch.  Fig- 
ure 130.  This  twitch  consists 
of  a  heavy  rope  with  a  loop  in 
each  end  to  carry  the  stick  by 
which  the  twitch  rope  is  tight^ 
ened  around  the  leg.  This  ap- 
pliance limits  the  leg  move- 
The  hock  twitch  is  apj^lied  about  4  inches  above  the 


Hock    Twitch. 


ment. 
hock. 

Figure  131  represents  Petersen's  hock 
joint  flexing  and  fixing  apparatus  for 
bending  and  holding  the  hind  leg  in  the 
flexed  position.  This  apparatus  consists 
of  two  heavy  leather  straps  attached  to  a 
specially  designed  metal  center  piece.  The 
metal  is  placed  against  and  in  the  flexure 
of  the  hock.  One  of  the  straps  is  attached 
around  the  leg  above  the  hock  and  the 
other  below  the  hock. 

Figure  132  illustrates  one  of  Dollar's 
modes   of  fixing  the   fore   and   hind   legs 


together  after  an  animal  is  cast. 


Fig.     131.      Petersen's 
Hock    Joint    Flexing 
and    Fixing    Appa- 
ratus. 


Knee  Straps. 

In  order  to  properly  throw  an  animal  with  casting  harness 
it  often  becomes  necessary  to  first  restrain  one  fore  leg  by  using 
some  form  of  knee  strap.  Sometimes,  or  with  some  forms  of 
casting  apparatus,  it  becomes  necessary  after  casting  to  apply 


112  RESTRAINT    OF    DOMESTIC    ANIMALS. 

the  knee  strap  in  order  to  complete  the  restraint.     These  can 
be  applied  to  one  or  both  fore  legs  to  a  good  advantage,  thus 


Fig.  132.    Dollar's  Method  of  Fixing  the  Fore  and  Hind  Legs  Together 

After  Casting. 


Fig.   133.    Author's 
Knee   Strap. 


Fig.    134.     Trasbot's       Fig.  135.    Hess'  Knee 
Knee    Strap.  Strap. 


insuring  most  perfect  restraint.  The  various  forms  of  knee 
straps  have  already  been  described  under  head  of  "restraint  of 
one  fore  leg,"  hence  it  is  unnecessary  to  again  describe  them. 


CASTING  AND  SECURING  HARNESS  AND  ROPES.  1 13 


137.       Magner's     Surcingle 
and  Strap. 


Fig.  136.   Fixing  Fore  Leg  Flexed 
With   Rope. 


Conhey's  Casting  and  Securing  Harness. 

The  Conkey  casting  and  securing  harness,  Eigiire  138, 
affords  us  a  safe  and  secure  means  of  restraint.  The  strap  parts 
are  of  rawhide,  carrying  heavy  metal  buckles  and  rings.  The 
ropes  are  best  grade  sisal.  All  parts  are  adjustable.  It  will  be 
observed  that  the  animal  is  mostly  cast  with  the  hobbles,  and 
secured  after  casting  with  the  harness. 


Directions  for  Casting  and  Restraining  ivith  Conkey's  Harness. 

First  apply  the  hood  (A).  This  is  done  by  laying  it  on 
the  withers  and  gently  drawing  it  up  over  the  head  until  it 
comes  in  place,  then  instruct  your  assistant  (1)  to  hold  the 
head  straight  with  the  body  and  well  up  as  shown  in  Figure 


114 


RESTRAINT    OF    DOMESTIC    ANIMALS. 


138 ;  should  the  animal  exhibit  a  restless  disposition  and  con- 
tinue to  move  about  after  applying  the  hood,  you  are  to  apply 
a  twitch  to  the  nose,  which  is  to  be  held  by  assistant  (1),  who 
must  not  allow  the  animal  to  move  forward  under  any  cir- 
cumstances. You  will  now  proceed  to  adjvist  the  harness  by 
placing  loin  strap  (B),  back  strap  (C),  belly  girth  (E)  and 
breast  strap  (F)  as  shown  in  Figure  138.  You  will  notice  that 
breast  strap  (F)  comes  below  the  sternum  and  against  the  arm 
of  front  legs  to  prevent  choking.     ISTow  buckle  the  short  pastern 


Fig.  138.     Conkey's  Casting  and  Securing  Harness  Applied. 


strap  (G)  to  the  right  hind  pastern,  Dee  in  front  and  buckle 
outside,  then  take  side  rope  (H),  pass  it  through  the  Dee  (G) 
from  right  to  left,  carry  it  up  to  the  side  ring,  passing  it  from 
left  to  right,  and  carry  it  back  across  the  hips,  handing  it  to 
assistant  ]^o.  2,  who  should  stand  close  behind,  facing  the 
animal  and  a  little  to  the  left. 

The  operator  (3)  will  now  proceed  to  buckle  the  other 
pastern  strap  (1)  to  the  left  hind  pastern.  Dee  in  front  and 
buckle  inside,  now  pass  the  side  rope  (J)  through  the  Dee 
(1)  from  right  to  left,  then  up  to  and  through  side  ring  froui 
left  to  right,  or  outside  in,  then  carry  it  through  under  the  belly 


CASTING  AND   SECUKING   HAKNESS  AND  EOPES.  II5 

dropping  it  in  a  convenient  place,  or  you  may  give  it  into  the 
hands  of  a  bystander  until  you  are  ready  for  it. 

The  operator  will  now  take  three  hobbles,  the  one  having  the 
chain  buckle  he  will  fasten  to  the  near  hind  leg,  buckle  inside 
or  to  the  right  and  just  below  the  pastern  strap  (I),  then 
buckle  the  other  two  hobbles  (K)  and  (L)  to  the  fore  pastern. 
Dees  behind  and  buckles  to  the  right,  now  pass  the  chain  rope 
from  right  to  left  through  the  right  Dee  (K)  and  the  left  Dee 
(L)  carrying  it  back  to  the  chain  buckle  and  pass  it  from  left 
to  right  through  the  chain  buckle  and  carry  it  forward  so  that 
the  operator  will  stand  just  in  front  and  about  3  feet  to  the 
right  of  the  animal  as  shown  in  the  cut  (138), 

If  a  third  assistant  (J)  is  employed,  which  may  be  done 
with  good  results,  he  is  to  stand  3  feet  behind  and  between  l^o. 
1  and  the  operator.  He  will  at  the  word  "pull,"  pull  just 
enough  to  keep  rope  (J)  tight  until  the  horse  drops,  the  operator 
managing  the  chain  rope  alone.  As  the  horse  drops,  the  opera- 
tor will  first  see  that  the  chain  buckle  has  clasped  the  chain, 
then  take  rope  (J)  from  his  assistant  (J)  and  proceed  a>^  if 
alone. 

Do  not  pull  a  pound  until  the  word  "pull"  is  given,  then 
you  are  to  pull  your  rope  across  the  hip  until  the  horse  drops  on 
the  left  side,  pulling  hard  enough  to  draw  the  foot  up  to,  or 
near  the  side  ring  to  which  the  rope  is  attached,  and  keep  it 
there  at  all  hazards. 

The  operator  (3)  will  now  take  a  firm  hold  of  chain  rope 
and  a  moderate  hold  of  rope  (J),  he  will  now  instruct  assistant 
(1)  to  step  the  horse  backward,  and  (above  all  do  not  allow 
the  horse  to  take  one  step  forward  as  he  might  trip  and  fall 
on  his  head,  causing  severe  injury)  push  until  he  falls  over 
on  his  left  side.  As  the  horse  lifts  his  near  hind  foot  the  oper- 
ator will  give  a  quick  pull  on  the  chain  rope,  drawing  the  hind 
leg  up  to  the  front  legs,  where  it  is  held  by  the  self-locking 
chain  Ijiickle,  at  the  same  time  shouting  pull.  Seeing  that  the 
chain  buckle  is  secure,  the  operator  turns  his  attention  to  the 
rope  (1),  holding  it  firm  enough  to  prevent  the  harness  from 
turning  on  the  horse  while  assistant  (2)  draws  the  off  foot  up 
near  the  ring,  giving  his  rope  one  turn  around  the  foot,  holding 


Ii6 


RESTRAINT    OF    DOMESTIC    ANIMALS. 


it  there  until  the  operator  unbuckles  the  chain  buckle  hobble 
from  the  hind  leg,  securing  the  leg  by  winding  the  rope  around 
the  foot,  then  back  around  the  hock,  describing  a  figure  8,  as 
shown  in  Figure  139 ;  give  the  rope  several  turns  quite  tight  to 
prevent  its  slipping  and  make  it  fast ;  now  proceed  to  secure  the 
off  hind  leg  in  the  same  manner.  Unbuckle  the  off  front  hobble 
(K),  take  knee  strap  (M),  give  it  one  turn  around  the  pastern, 
then  up  around  the  arm,  flexing  the  leg  as  shown  in  Figure  139 ; 
then  unbuckle  the  near  hobble   (L),  flex  and  bind  the  leg  in 


Fig.    139.    Conkey's  Casting    and    Securing    Harness — Animal   Cast  and 

Secured. 


the  same  manner;  now  instruct  assistant  (1)  to  hold  the  head 
as  follows :  Place  your  knee  on  the  horse's  shoulder,  your  right 
foot  so  that  the  leg  comes  against  the  horse's  back;  with  your 
left  hand  grasp  the  halter  or  hood  while  the  right  hand  is  to 
grasp  the  rope  at  some  convenient  point  near  the  hind  foot, 
holding  the  animal  in  the  position  shown  by  the  cut.  Assistant 
(2)  will  grasp  the  hock,  lifting  the  leg  a  little  upward  and  you 
have  the  animal  in  the  most  desirable  position  that  it  is  possible 


to  gain. 


In  releasing  the  animal,  remove  the  knee  straps  first;  then 


CASTING  AND  SECUEING   HARNESS  AND  ROPES. 


117 


release  the  lower  hind  leg  and  then  the  upper  one ;  unbuckle 
the  belly  girth  (E),  then  breast  strap  (F),  and  lastly  remove 
the  operating  hood  and  assist  the  animal  to  rise. 

^y.  F.  Knowles'  Casting  and  Securing  Harness. 
The  casting  and  securing  harness  illustrated  in  Figure  140 


were  designed  by  W.  F.  Knowles. 


These  harness  are  made  in 


Fig.  140.     W.  F.  Knowles'  Casting  and  Securing  Harness — Applied. 


large  and  small  sizes.  The  large  size  fits  horses  weighing  900 
pounds  or  more,  and  small  size  harness  fits  those  of  smaller  size. 
This  apparatus  is  light,  compact,  and  convenient  to  carry. 
When  properly  used  it  affords  ample  restraint  for  all  ordinary 
purposes.  It  consists  of  a  flat  webbing  collar,  two  main  ropes 
and  two  hobble  straps.  The  collar  is  in  tw^o  sections  (h)  (g)  ; 
each  section  is  connected  on  each  side  of  the  horse  by  heavy 


ii8 


KESTKAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


double  rings  (e),  one  of  which  is  of  special  design  (i)  to  afford 
easy  passage  of  the  two  main  ropes  (d)    (c).     The  ropes  (d) 

(c)  are  each  %-inch  in  diameter  and  20  feet  long.  One  end  is 
securely  fastened  into  the  inner  ring  (e)  of  the  webbing  breast 
collar.  Around  each  pastern  (a)  (b)  is  placed  a  webbing 
hobble  (j).  In  each  end  of  this  webbing  hobble  is  fixed  a 
specially  constructed  metal  rounded  '^D"  (K)  (K)  through 
which  the  ropes  pass.  To  apply  this  harness  the  breast  collar 
is  placed  over  the  head  and  adjusted  to  the  shoulders.  One 
section  fits  over  the  withers  (h)  and  the  other  section  is  dropped 
down  below  point  of  shoulders  (g).     The  free  end  of  the  ropes 

(d)  (c)  passes  downward  to  and  through  each  "D"  of  webbing 
hobble;  then  upward  to  and  through  "D'i  (e)  of  breast  collar. 
If  desired  to  cast  horse  on  off  side,  the  off  fore  foot  is  to  be 
raised  and  secured  by  some  form  of  knee  strap.  The  free  end 
of  main  rope  on  near  side  should  be  carried  backward  over  back 
and  held  by  two  assistants.     The  free  end  of  main  rope  (f)  on 

C'tDff  side  should  be  carried  forward,  well  in  front  of  the  animal 
and  there  held  by  two  assistants.  To  cast  the  animal  traction 
is  made  on  each  rope  and  at  the  same  time  the  animal  is  forced 
backward  a  step  by  assistant  in  charge  of  the  head.  The  head 
is  pulled  to  the  right,  and  the  animal  is  cast  on'off  side.  After 
being  cast  the  animal  may  be  secured  by  two  methods. 


Animal  Cast  and'  Secured  with  W.   F.   Knowles'  Casting 
Harness  by  Crossed  Rope  IVIethod. 


CASTING  AND  SECURING   HARNESS  AND  ROPES. 


119 


Figure  141  represents  animal  secured  by  the  crossed  rope 
method.  This  tie  is  made  by  drawing  the  foot  (c)  forward; 
take  a  half  hitch  around  pastern  to  fix  rope ;  then  pass  rope 
down  over  back;  then  under  horse  and  around  hip  (f)  ;  thence 
to  pastern  (c),  where  it  is  fixed  by  one  or  more  half  hitches. 
The  knee  strap  is  applied  to  near  fore  leg,  after  which  turn 
animal  over.  The  same  procedure  is  gone  through  with  on  the 
opposite  side,  which  secures  the  horse  by  crossing  the  ropes  (i) 
in  front,  also  on  the  back.  A  back  rope  may  then  be  applied 
from  crossed  ropes  behind  to  breast  collar  at  withers.  This  pre- 
vents ropes  from  slipping  off  the  hips. 


Fig.  142.    Animal  Cast  and  Secured  witii  W.   F.    Knowles'   Harness  by 
Half  Hitches  Above  and  Behind  Hock. 

Figure  142  represents  an  animal  cast  and  secured  with  W. 
F.  Knowles'  harness  by  half  hitches  above  and  behind  hock  (h) 
(g)  ;  these  retain  the  hock  in  a  flexed  position  which  affords  free 
access  to  the  inguinal  region.  In  securing  by  this  method 
(Figure  142)   no  back  rope  is  required. 

WhitwelVs  Casting  and  Securing  Harness. 

The  Whitwell  casting  and  securing  harness,  Figure  143, 
are  similar  in  many  respects  to  those  of  W.  F.  Knowles  (Figure 


I20  RESTRAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 

140)  ;  the  principal  variation  is  in  the  breast  collar.  It  will 
be  observed  that  the  breast  collar  of  Whitwell's  harness  consists 
of  an  over-withers  strap  (k)  attached  on  each  side  to  metal 
blank  buckles  (b)  ;  those  carry  the  adjustable  rope  (d)  which 
completes  the  breast  collar.  This  harness  is  applied  and  the 
animal  cast  and  secured  same  as  by  using  W.  F.  Knowles' 
harness  (Figures  140,  141  and  142.) 


Fig.  143.     Whitwell's  Casting  and  Securing  Harness. 

Hulburt's  Casting  and  Securing  Harness. 

The  Ilulburt  casting  and  securing  harness,  Figure  144, 
consists  of  a  very  heavy  and  substantial  body  belt  (f)  made  of 
leather.  This  body  belt  is  applied  so  that  the  four  heavy  metal 
"D's"  (e)  hang  down  imder  the  chest.  The  body  belt  is  pre- 
vented from  slipping  forward  by  a  crupper.  A  rope  rein  (h) 
is  fastened  around  lower  jaw  (j)  and  to  body  belt  (i).     This 


CASTING  AND  SECURING   HARNESS  AND  ROPES.  I2I 

rein  is  used  for  controlling  the  head.  A  rope  is  looped  around 
one  hind  pastern  (a)  and  then  carried  forward  (d)  to  and 
through  one  of  the  "D's"  of  body  belt.  One  fore  leg  is  fixed 
by  means  of  a  knee  strap  to  one  of  the  "D's"  in  the  body  belt; 
this  puts  the  horse  on  three  legs,  which  places  him  at  a  dis- 
advantage while  being  cast  by  traction  on  free  end  of  rope  (c) 
at  the  same  time  head  is  drawn  around  to  side.  After  casting, 
the  other  two  legs  are  secured  to  "D"  of  body  belt  by  means  of 
hobbles  and  knee  straps. 


Fig.    144.    Hulburt's   Casting   and   Securing    Harness — Applied. 


G.  W.  Ziegler's  Casting  Harness. 

The  casting  harness  of  G.  W.  Ziegler,  Figure  145,  consists 
of  an  over-withers  strap  which  carries  at  each  end  a  heavy  metal 
ring  (a)  ;  into  this  main  ring  another  ring  is  fastened  (b),  also 
the  girth  rope,  breast  rope  (j)  and  main  casting  rope  (m).  This 
casting  rope  is  passed  over  the  back,  then  downward  (c)  to  and 
through  hobble  strap  ring  (d)  of  off  hind  pastern,  thence  upward 
and  forward   (f)    to  and  through  ring   (b)   on  opposite  side. 


122  RESTRAINT    OF    DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 

The  same  arrangement  of  ropes  is  made  on  the  other  side.  One 
fore  leg  is  flexed  and  fixed  bj  using  a  knee  strap.  The  animal 
is  cast  by  making  traction  on  free  ends  of  main  ropes  (n). 


Fig.  145.    G.  W.  Ziegler's  Casting  and  Securing   Harness. 


Danish  Casting  and  Securing  Harness. 

The  original  Danish  method  of  casting  has  been  modified  in 
at  least  three  instances.  The  authors  of  these  three  modifica- 
tions are  Abilgaard,  Pfeiffer  and  Mathias.  The  original  Danish 
casting  harness,  Figure  14G,  consists  of  a  body  girth,  breast 
strap,  four  hobble  straps,  and  two  main  casting  ropes.  The 
body  girth  is  heavy  and  strong.  It  carries  a  heavy  ''D"  at 
bottom  (e)  and  one  at  the  top  (h).  The  breast  strap  (i)  is 
adjustable  and  is  attached  to  body  girth  on  each  side  of  horse  to 
prevent  girth  from  slipping  backward.  A  hobble  strap  is  applied 
to  each  pastern.  If  it  is  desired  to  cast  horse  on  near  side  one 
of  the  main  ropes  is  attached  to  hobble  strap  ring  of  off  fore  leg 
(d)  ;  the  rope  is  then  passed  across  to  and  through  hobble  ring 
(c)  of  near  fore  leg;  thence  backward  to  and  through  hobble 
ring  of  near  hind  (b)  ;  then  upward  through  "D"  (e)  of  body 
girth.     Traction  is  made  from  free  end  of  rope  (j).     The  other 


CASTING  AND   SECURING   HARNESS  AND  ROPES. 


123 


main  rope  begins  at  hobble  ring  of  off  bind ;  then  carry  rope  (g) 
upward  to  and  tbrongh  "D"  (h)  on  top  of  the  body  girth.  As 
will  be  observed  by  the  nse  of  this  process,  the  casting  is  done 
by  forcing  the  animal  to  flex  his  legs,  followed  by  its  slowly 
falling  on  the  bed.  The  legs  being  tied  up  to  the  body,  their 
extension  is  impossible ;  muscular  contraction  is  limited,  and 
excessive  flexion  of  the  vertebral  column  prevented.     Besides 


Fig.  146.     The    Original    Danish   Casting    Harness. 


this,  the  complete  flexion  of  the  extremities  allows  full  view 
and  easy  access  to  all  regions,  especially  the  inguinal. 

To  cast  the  horse  the  head  is  held  by  an  assistant;  a  pull 
made  at  the  same  time  on  the  chain  and  on  the  rope  bringing  the 
legs  together — the  animal  is  cast.  The  chain  is  fixed  in  the 
usual  way  and  the  rope  pulling  near  hind  leg  close  to  the  body 
and  towards  the  upper  ring  of  the  belt,  is  secured  by  half 
hitches  around  the  coronet. 


124  EESTKAINT   OF    DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 

Danish  Casting  Harness  as  Modified  by  Matthias. 

The  casting  harness,  Figure  147,  represents  Matthias'  modi- 
fication of  the  Danish  casting  harness.  It  is  similar  in  all 
respects  to  the  original  Danish  casting  harness  (Figure  146) 
with  the  exception  of  the  breast  collar.  In  the  harness,  as 
modified  by  Matthias,  a  martingale  breast  collar  is  substituted 
for  the  plain  strap  breast  collar  of  the  original. 


Fig.  147.    Danish  Casting  Harness  as  Modified  by  IVIatthias. 

Danish  Casting  Harness  as  Modified  by  Pfeiffer. 

Figure  148  represents  Pfeifi^er's  modification  of  the  Danish 
casting  harness.  This  again  is  the  same  outfit  as  the  original, 
with  the  exception  of  the  breast  collar.     The  collar  of  Pfeiffer 


CASTING  AND  SECURING   HARNESS  AND  ROPES. 


125 


Fig.  148.     Danish  Harness  as  Modified  by  Pfeiffer. 

is  of  leather  and  extra  heavy.  It  is  attached  to  the  body  girth 
by  a  strap  (f)  passing  from  lower  margin  of  collar  backward 
between  the  fore  legs  to  lower  margin  of  body  girth  (e).  The 
rope  and  hobble  strap  arrangement  is  same  as  that  of  Figures 
145  and  146. 


Danish  Casting  and  Securing  Harness  as  Modified  hy  Ahil- 

gaard. 

Figure  149  represents  Abilgaard's  modification  of  the 
Danish  casting  harness,  and  consists  of  a  heavy  body  girth 
which  carries  a  strong  metal  "D"  under  the  chest  (f),  three 
hobble  straps  and  three  ropes.  The  hobble  straps  are  applied 
to  both  hind  pasterns  and  near  fore  pastern  in  order  to  cast 
animal  on  the  off  side.  One  rope  is  attached  to  hobble  ring  of 
off  hind ;  then  it  is  passed  forward  to  hobble  ring  of  near  fore : 


126 


RESTRAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


thence  upward  to  and  through  "D"  of  girth  (f).  Traction  is 
made  from  free  end  of  rope  (C).  Another  rope  starts  from 
hobble  ring  (k)  of  near  hind  and  passes  upward  (i)  and  for- 
ward over  back  (a).  Traction  is  also  made  from  free  end  of 
this  rope  (1).  The  third  rope  is  used  to  flex  and  fix  the  oft 
fore  leg.  This  foot  is  raised  and  knee  rope  applied  before 
casting. 


Fig.   149.     Danish   Casting    and   Securing    Harness  as    IVIodified    by 

Abiigaard. 


Bohard's  Method  of  Casting  [and  Restraining  a  Horse    With 

Ropes. 

The  rope  method  of  Rohard,  Figure  150,  is  simple  in  its 
construction  and  convenient  in  its  application.  It  is  intended 
to  be  used  in  casting  and  restraining  wild,  nervous  or  vicious 
animals  on  occasions  where  sufficient  help  for  other  methods 
is  unavailable.  A  rope  25  feet  long,  furnished  with  a  loop  in 
end,  is  all  that  is  necessary  in  making  this  appliance.  To  apply 
this  rope  and  cast  a  horse  an  assistant  holds  the  halter  rein  in 


CASTING  AND  SECURING   HARNESS  AND  ROPES.  127 

one  band  and  the  animal's  ear  in  the  other.  If  the  horse  is  to 
be  cast  on  the  off  side  the  operator  stands  on  the  near  side  oppo- 
site the  horse's  shonlder.  About  8  feet  from  the  other  end  of 
the  rope  a  ring  knot  (a)  is  made;  this  forms  the  loop  (n)  (i) 
which  is  then  placed  over  the  horse's  head  and  around  base 
of  neck  in  form  of  a  collar.  Below  this  ring  a  check  or  lock 
knot  is  made ;  this  latter  knot  holds  the  rope  and  prevents  it 


Fig.  150.    Rohard's   Method  of  Casting  a   Horse  witli    Ropes. 


from  slipping.  These  knots  reach  near  the  point  of  shoulder. 
The  other  end  of  the  rope  is  placed  behind  the  fore  arm  below 
the  elbow,  then  brought  around  the  outer  side  of  the  near  fore 
arm ;  thence  in  front  of  both  fore  arms  (b)  and  lastly  carried 
around  the  outer  aspect  of  the  off  fore  arm  under  the  portion 
which  has  been  passed  around  the  back  part.  By  the  above 
arrangement  we  have  the  fore  arms  enclosed  in  the  rope.  This 
rope   is  then  tightened  by  bringing  the   two   fore  legs  closer 


128 


RESTRAINT   OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


together.  An  assistant  holds  this  rope  arrangement  in  place 
while  the  operator  passes  the  free  end  of  the  rope  (d)  under  the 
body  to  and  around  the  near  hind  pastern  (f )  ;  then  back  to 
the  withers  (o)  on  the  off  side.  The  operator  grasps  free  end 
of  rope  (o)  by  a  firm  hold,  his  body  pressing  at  the  same  time 
against  the  horse's  near  shoulder.  Then  a  gentle  pull  is  made; 
at  the  same  time  lightly  kick  the  horse's  near  hind  foot  to  cause 
him  to  lift  it ;  continue  pulling  slack  out  of  rope  until  leg  is 
completely  flexed  and  animal  will  sink  and  fall  lightly  upon  the 
ground.  The  legs  are  then  secured  in  the  following  manner : 
On  the  near  hind  leg  the  free  end  of  rope  is  passed  around 


Fig.  151.     Rohard's  Method  of  Securing  a  Horse  After  Casting. 


pastern  but  below  the  other  part  of  rope  proceeding  from  the 
fore  leg,  and  there  tied  so  that  this  pastern  is  secured  by  a  double 
twitch  knot.  The  remainder  of  the  rope  is  carried  up  to  the 
neck  portion  and  hitched  there.  Then  it  is  brought  back  to  and 
around  the  off  hind  pastern  and  finally  tied  to  the  neck  rope 
by  a  single  knot.  To  effectually  use  this  method  much  practice 
is  required.  The  operator  should  constantly  bear  in  mind  the 
fact  that  the  best  results  are  obtained  w^here  the  hind  leg  is 
pulled  forward  and  completely  flexed. 

Figure  151  represents  a  horse  cast  and  restrained  by  the 
rope  method  of  Rohard.  Only  one  assistant  is  necessary  in 
casting  and  securing  a  horse  by  this  method. 


CASTING  AND  SECURING  HARNESS  AND  ROPES.  129 

Hayes'  Improvised  Casting  Ropes. 

The  collar  loop,  Figure  152,  of  Hayes'  improvised  casting 
ropes  consists  of  a  rope  loop  (d)  large  enough  to  slip  over  the 
head  and  small  enough  to  fit  snugly  around  base  of  neck.     Into 


Fig.  152.     Collar  Loop  of  Hayes'  Improvised  Casting  Ropes. 

the  knot  (c)  at  base  of  this  loop  two  2i/2-inch  metal  rings  are 
fixed.  To  prevent  these  rings  from  slipping  out  of  place  another 
knot  is  made  in  rope  behind  them.  This  completes  the  collar 
loop  of  Hayes. 

Figure  153  represents  Hayes'  casting  ropes  applied.     It  will 
be  observed  that  the  loop  is  placed  around  the  neck  (d)  with 


Fig.   153.    Hayes'    Improvised   Casting   Ropes  Applied. 


the  knots  and  rings  placed  near  the  withers  (c).  There  are 
two  free  ends  of  the  ropes  (i)  (j)  ;  these  are  each  28  feet  long. 
From  the  withers  (c)  these  ropes  are  passed  downward  on  each 


I30 


EESTEAINT    OF    DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


side  to  and  through  rings  of  hobbles  on  each  hind  pastern  (k) 
(h),  thence  upward  (g)  to  and  through  the  metal  rings  at 
withers  (c).  One  fore  foot  is  raised  and  fixed  with  a  knee 
strap.  The  animal  is  then  cast  and  secured  in  the  ordinary 
manner. 

Dollar's  Rope  Method  of  Casting  with  Double  Side  Line. 

The  double  side  line  method  of  Dollar,  Figure  154,  consists 
of  a  %-inch  rope  50  feet  long.   In  the  middle  of  this  rope  a  loop 


Fig.  154.    Dollar's  Rope  Method  of  Casting  with  Double  Side  Line. 


is  made  (h)  large  enough  to  fit  around  base  of  neck.  The  knot 
is  placed  against  chest  and  each  rope  (d)  (e)  is  passed  down- 
ward to  and  around  each  hind  pastern  (k)  (h)  ;  then  upward 
through  the  neck  loop  (a).  To  cast  the  animal  the  free  ends 
of  the  ropes  are  each  held  by  two  assistants.  One  of  the  fore 
feet  (c)  is  lifted  and  held  flexed  by  an  assistant  or  secured  by  a 
knee  strap.     One  of  the  main  ropes  is  now  pulled  outward  at 


CASTING  AND   SECUKING   HARNESS  AND  KOPES. 


131 


right  angles  to  the  shoulder  and  the  other  backward.  When 
traction  is  made  on  the  ropes  with  them  in  this  position  it  causes 
the  animal  to  drop  upon  its  hocks  and  finally  upon  the  ground. 
A  plate-longe  or  webbing  "unbalancing  strap"  may  be  attached 
to  surcingle  to  aid  in  unbalancing  the  atiimal.  As  soon  as  the 
animal  falls  to  the  ground  the  ropes  are  tightened  and  animal 
rolled  on  its  back — dorsal  position.  The  hind  feet  should  be 
drawn  down  close  to  the  abdomen  and  secured  by  one  or  more 
half  hitches  around  each  hind  pastern.  "Halter  burns"  can  be 
avoided  by  first  applying  bandages  around  hind  pasterns.  It 
is  advisable  to  use  cotton  rope  when  possible  in  casting  and  re- 
straining horses  by  this  method. 


Lernherg  Casting  Ropes. 

Krolokowski's  Lernberg  casting  and  securing  ropes,  Figure 
1.55,  consist  of  65  feet  of  %-inch  rope,  two  hobble  straps,  and  a 


Fig.    155.     Lernberg    Casting    Ropes    Applied — Krolokowski's. 


132 


RESTRAINT   OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


short  rope  with  which  to  fix  the  fore  legs  together.  In  center 
of  main  rope  a  neck  loop  is  made.  This  loop  should  be  large 
enough  to  fit  around  base  of  neck  (g)  (h).  The  knot  is  placed 
in  front  of  breast  (h).  The  fore  pasterns  should  now  be  fixed 
together  by  means  of  a  short  cross  rope  or  strap  (a)  (b).  The 
main  ropes  should  be  carried  downward  under  cross  rope  (a) 
(b),  then  backward  to  and  through  hobble  strap  rings  on  each 
hind  pastern  (d)  (e)  ;  thence  upward  on  each  side  of  horse; 
then  over  the  back  (f).  The  horse  is  cast  by  making  traction 
on  free  ends  of  main  ropes  (i)  (j).  It  is  secured  after  casting 
by  two  or  more  half  hitches  around  each  hind  pastern. 


McDonald's  Casting  Ropes. 

The  casting  ropes  of  McDonald,  Figure  156,  consist  of 
60  feet  of  %-inch  rope.  This  rope  is  then  doubled  so  that  one 
free  end  will  be  8  feet  longer  than  its  fellow  on  the  opposite 
side.  A  neck  loop  (H)  is  made  in  this  rope  at  its  middle  and 
placed  over  the  head  and  around  base  of  neck  in  the  ordinary 


Fig.    156.     McDonald's   Casting    Ropes — Horse    Secured. 


CASTING  AND  SECURING   HARNESS  AND  ROPES.  133 

manner.  The  long  end  of  the  rope  being  placed  on  the  side  upon 
which  we  expect  to  cast  the  horse.  Then  cast  him  in  the  usual 
way.  After  being  cast,  the  operator  pulls  the  under  rope  back- 
ward under  the  withers  and  winds  it  two  or  three  times  around 
the  upper  fetlock.  The  rope  is  then  passed  down  in  front  of 
the  upper  stifle  (A),  then  backward  and  under  the  quarters, 
bringing  it  up  on  the  outside  of  the  opposite  thigh  (B)  and 
around  the  front  of  the  lower  hind  fetlock.  The  rope  is  now 
steadily  and  firmly  pulled  until  the  hind  legs  are  well  flexed; 
then  it  is  wound  twice  around  the  lower  hind  fetlock,  passed 
down  in  front  of  stifle  (C),  over  the  quarter  to  the  opposite 
side;  then  upward  on  inside  of  the  thigh  (D).  Xow  pull 
firm  and  wind  rope  twice  around  the  upper  hind  fetlock  and 
hand  rope  to  an  assistant  to  hold.  The  fore  legs  are  flexed  and 
secured  by  a  knee  rope  or  knee  straps. 

It  will  be  observed  that  when  an  animal  is  cast  and  secured 
by  the  rope  method  of  McDonald  the  hind  legs  are  intensely 
flexed  and  the  feet  (hind  feet)  are  firmly  and  securely  fastened 
to  the  horse's  own  hind  quarters. 

Over's  Double  Side  Line  Casting  Ropes. 

The  double  side  line  casting  ropes  of  Over,  Figure  157,  con- 
sist of  two  %-inch  ropes.  One  rope  is  20  feet  long,  the  other 
one  25  feet  long,  and  two  hobble  straps.  Double  the  longer 
rope  and  at  its  middle  make  a  loop  to  fit  around  base  of  neck, 
the  knot  being  on  the  off  side  and  loop  near  the  withers  (a). 
Pass  the  free  end  of  the  rope  (e)  through  hobble  strap  ring  on 
off  hind,  then  upward  (a)  through  the  collar  loop  (b)  ;  then 
over  the  back  where  it  is  handed  to  an  assistant  (c).  Attach 
the  other  rope  by  a  loop  around  the  near  fore  pastern  (g)  ;  then 
pass  its  free  end  backward  to  and  through  hobble  strap  ring 
on  near  hind  pastern  (f).  The  rope  should  now  be  crossed 
over  and  brought  outside  the  animal's  off  fore  leg  and  there 
held  by  an  assistant  (h).  This  assistant  should  stand  some- 
what in  front  of  the  horse  and  to  the  off  side.  To  cast  the 
animal  the  assistant  in  front  makes  traction  on  rope  (h)  ;  this 
lifts  the  near  hind  foot  off  the  ground  and  draws  it  forward 


134 


EESTKAINT   OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Fig.  157.     Over's  Double  Side  Line  Casting  Ropes  Applied. 

and  causes  the  horse  to  drop  down  on  his  near  hind  quarter 
and  finally  to  the  ground.  The  horse  is  secured  after  casting 
by  placing  a  hobble  strap  on  off  fore  pastern.  The  rope  which 
has  already  been  passed  from  near  fore  to  near  hind  is  now 
passed  through  hobble  strap  ring  on  off  fore.  By  tightening 
this  rope  the  two  fore  feet  and  near  hind  foot  are  brought 
together.  In  this  position  they  are  secured  by  two  or  more  half 
hitches  around  one  of  the  pasterns.  The  other  rope  is  tight- 
ened until  the  off  hind  foot  is  pulled  down  near  the  abdomen. 
It  is  then  and  there  fixed  by  tying  to  collar. 


Russian  Method  of  Casting  with  Ropes. 

The  Russian  method  of  casting  with  ropes,  Figure  158,  is 
similar  in  many  respects  to  that  of  Rohard,  Figure  150.  It 
(Russian)  consists  of  a  %-inch  rope  25  feet  long;  at  one  end 
is  a  heavy  metal  ring  3  inches  in  diameter.  If  the  horse  is  to 
be  cast  on  the  off  side,  the  collar  is  made  by  simply  looping  the 
ring  end  of  rope  (h)  around  base  of  neck  (d)  (e).  The  free 
end  of  the  rope  (b)  is  carried  downward  to  and  around  off  hind 
pastern   (a)  ;   then  forward  and  upward    (c)    to  and  through 


CASTING  AND  SECUEING   HARNESS  AND  ROPES. 


135 


ring  (h).  The  operator  now  stands  on  the  off  side,  the  side 
upon  which  the  animal  is  to  fall,  and  makes  traction  on  the 
halter  rein  (e)  with  one  hand  and  free  end  of  rope  (g)  with  the 
other.     This  compels  the  horse  to  lie  down. 


Fig.  158.     Russian   Method  of  Casting  With   Ropes. 


Ordinary  Double  Side  Line  Ropes. 

The  rope  used  in  casting  and  securing  a  horse  by  the  ordi- 
nary double  side  line  method,  Figure  159,  should  be  %-inch 
in  diameter  and  60  feet  long.  It  is  doubled  and  at  its  middle 
a  collar  or  neck  loop  (k)  (h)  is  made  by  tying  a  simple  knot 
(h).  This  collar  loop  is  placed  around  base  of  neck;  the  ropes 
are  then  passed  do^^Tlward  between  the  fore  legs,  then  backward 
(e)  (f)  to  and  around — from  without  inward — each  hind  pas- 
tern  (a)    (b)  ;   thence  under  the  preceding  rope  in  a  crossed 


136 


RESTRAINT   OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Fig.  159.     Ordinary  Double  Side  Line  Ropes  Applied. 

position  (c)  (d)  and  back  under  collar  loop  (g).  The  horse  is 
cast  by  making  traction  from  behind  on  free  ends  of  ropes  (i) 
(j).  If  this  method  is  used  the  hind  pasterns  should  first  be 
bandaged  to  prevent  ^'halter  or  rope  burns."  It  is  better  to 
use  an  ordinary  hobble  strap  on  the  hind  pasterns  and  allow  the 
two  ropes  of  the  double  side  line  to  pass  through  the  hobble  strap 


Fig.  160.    Ordinary  Double  Side  Line  Ropes — Horse  Cast  and  Secured. 


CASTING  AND  SECURING   HARNESS  AND  ROPES. 


137 


rings.  Cast  in  the  ordinary  manner.  After  casting  the  animal 
can  be  secured  by  tightening  main  ropes  until  hind  feet  are 
drawn  well  forward  and  down  close  to  the  abdomen,  Figure 
IGO.  The  ropes  are  now  fixed  by  taking  two  or  more  half 
hitclies  around  the  hind  pasterns ;  then  pass  ropes  over  loins 
and  under  back  and  fix  by  half  hitches  over  hind  pasterns. 

Miles'  Rope  Method  of  Casting  and  Securing  "Ridglings" 
(  Cryptorchids. ) 

The  rope  method  of  casting  and  securing  horses,  as  designed 
and  used  by  "Farmer"  Miles  in  his  "Ridgling  castration  opera- 
tions," Figure  161,  consists  of  a  cotton  rope  %  inches  in 
diameter  and  66  feet  long.  The  rope  is  doubled  and  at  its 
middle  a  collar  or  neck  loop  is  made  by  tying  a  knot  in  the 
rope.     This  rope  plays  no  part  in  casting  the  horse ;  it  is  simply 


Fig.  161.     Miles'    Rope   Method  of  Casting  and  Securing  a  "Ridgling. 

(First  Position.) 


138 


EESTKAINT   OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


for  restraint  after  casting.  The  casting  is  done  with  Miles' 
rope  hobbles,  Figures  86  and  109.  To  cast  and  secure  a  horse 
by  Miles'  method  a  suitable  place  is  selected.  The  Miles  twitch, 
Figure  5,  is  applied  and  tied  up  to  side  of  halter.  Figure  6. 
The  halter  rein  is  held  by  an  assistant.  The  loop  of  the  Miles 
casting  ropes  is  then  placed  over  the  horse's  head  and  around 
base  of  neck  (u)  (r),  with  knot  (r)  in  front  of  breast.  Both 
ropes  are  passed  between  the  fore  legs  and  backward  (i)  (j) — 
from  within  outward,  around  the  hind  legs  above  the  hocks 
(m)  ;  then  forward  and  upward  (k)  (1)  through  the  collar 
loop  (q).     The  free  ends  of  the  ropes  (s)  (t)  are  now  handed 


Fig.  162.     Miles'  Rope   Method  of  Casting  and  Securing  a  "Ridgling-" 
(Second    Position.) 


to  two  assistants  who  are  instructed  to  keep  all  slack  out  of 
them,  but  not  to  pull  a  pound  until  after  the  horse  is  on  the 
ground.  The  Miles  rope  hobbles  are  now  applied.  With  the 
operator  holding  the  tail  the  command  is  given  and  the  horse 
is  cast  by  two  assistants  making  traction  on  free  end  of  main 
hobble  rope  (a).  After  the  horse  is  cast,  Figure  162,  the  ropes 
are  dropped  from  above  the  hocks  (m)  down  to  the  hind  pas- 
terns. The  hobbles  are  now  removed  and  the  fore  legs  flexed 
and  fixed  by  means  of  knee  ropes  or  straps.  Sufficient  traction 
is  now  made  on  free  ends  of  the  main  ropes  to  draw  the  hind 
feet  well  forward.  The  rope  is  now  fixed  by  taking  two  or  more 
half  hitches  around  the  near  hind  pastern,  then  carry  rope  over 


CASTING  AND  SECURING   HARNESS  AND  ROPES. 


139 


behind  the  horse  iii  front  of  stillo  (over  the  loins  and  under 
rump),  and  back  behind  the  lower  thigh;  then  across  in  front 
of  scrotum  (k).  After  drawing  the  rope  tight  and  hind  feet 
against  abdomen,  fix  it  around  upper  pastern  (j)  with  two  or 
three  half  hitches.  The  horse  is  now  turned  over  and  the  same 
modus  operandi  proceeded  with  on  the  other  side. 

It  will  be  observed  that  the  ropes  are  crossed  both  in  front 
and  behind.  To  prevent  them  from  slipping  off  the  hips  a  back 
rope  may  be  applied.  This  back  rope  is  attached  to  the  crossed 
ropes  behind  hips  and  to  the  collar  loop  on  top  of  neck  in  front. 
If  it  is  desired  to  have  the  legs  stretched  wider  part  the  same 
can  readily  be  done  by  inserting  the  Miles  leg  spreader  between 
the  hind  feet. 


Fig.    163.    Cowie's   Casting   and    Securing    Harness — Improved. 


I40  EESTSAINT   OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 

Cowie's  Casting  and  Securing  Harness,  Improved. 

The  casting  and  securing  harness  of  Cowie,  Figure  163, 
is  strong,  safe  and  convenient.  The  chains  (4)  (5)  prevent 
wear  on  the  ropes,  and  the  lock  buckles  (3)  will  not  allow 
them   to  be   drawn  backward.      It   is   therefore   automatic   in 


Fig.  164.  Lewis'  Modification  of  Cowie's  Casting  and  Securing  Harness. 


locking.  The  body  girth  (1)  is  made  of  leather  and  strong. 
This  girth  carries  a  lock  buckle  (3)  on  each  side,  also  two 
"D's,"  to  which  the  chains  are  attached.  Over  the  loins  is  a 
heavy  leather  strap  (2)  for  the  purpose  of  fixing  the  hind  legs 
in  a  flexed  position  after  casting.  This  strap  is  prevented  from 
slipping  backward  by  its  attachment  (15)   to  the  body  girth. 


CASTING  AND  SECURING   HARNESS  AND  ROPES.  141 

Four  hobble  straps  (G)  (7)  (8)  (9)  are  used  on  casting  by 
this  method.  To  the  end  of  each  chain  a  12-foot  rope  is  at- 
tached. In  casting  the  horse  these  ropes  are  carried  from  their 
attachment  to  the  body  girth  to  and  through  hobble  strap  rings 
(6)  (7)  on  each  hind  pastern.  Then  forward  (10)  (11)  to 
and  through  hobble  strap  rings  on  fore  pasterns;  thence  up- 
ward to  and  through  the  lock  buckles  (3)-  To  cast  the  animal 
traction  is  made  on  free  end  of  main  ropes  (12).  This  draws 
all  the  feet  together  and  against  the  body  girth  and  they  are 
retained  there  by  the  action  of  the  self-locking  buckles  on  each 
side.  After  the  horse  is  cast  the  loin  strap  (2)  is  buckled  at 
each  end  around  each  hind  leg  above  the  ankle.  This  holds 
the  hind  legs  flexed  and  secure. 

Figure  164  represents  Cowie's  improved  casting  and  secur- 
ing harness  as  modified  by  Lewis.  The  modification  consists 
of  a  breast  collar  attached  to  body  girth  on  each  side  of  horse. 
This  breast  collar  carries  two  buckles  (16)  into  which  the  knee 
straps  (not  shown  in  the  illustration)  buckle.  The  knee  straps 
are  buckled  around  the  leg  above  the  ankles  and  answer  the 
same  purpose  in  front  as  the  loin  strap  (2)  do  behind.  The 
breast  strap  (17)  prevents  the  body  girth  from  slipping  back- 
ward. 

"One  Man"  Methods  of  Casting  and  Securing  a  Horse. 

There  are  at  least  five  good  and  reliable  methods  whereby 
one  man  is  enabled  to  cast  and  secure  a  full  grown  horse  with 
ease  and  safety.  The  methods  referred  to  are  the  Russian,  Gal- 
vayne,  Gleason,  Magner  and  Rarey. 

Russian  Method. 

The  Russian  method,  Figure  165  (first  position),  is  not 
intended  to  be  used  by  a  "tenderfoot."  It  requires  courage, 
strength,  alertness  and  practice.  To  cast  by  this  method  a  12- 
foot  rope  carrying  a  loop  at  one  end  is  necessary.  If  the  horse 
is  to  be  cast  on  the  near  side  the  operator  stands  close  to  the 
horse  on  that  side.  Be  sure  and  do  not  fall  before  the  horse 
does.     A  loop  is  passed  around  the  base  of  the  neck.     The  free 


142 


EESTRAINT   OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


end  of  the  rope  is  passed  downward  and  around  near  hind 
pastern  (d),  then  back  to  and  through  loop  (a)  in  main  rope. 
This  rope  is  now  held  in  the  operator's  right  hand  (c).  The 
operator  at  this  time  is  standing  on  the  near  side  of  the  Horse ; 


Fig.  165.     First  Positron  Russi'an  One  Man  Method  of  Casting  and 
Securing  a  Horse. 

his  right  elbow  is  supported  by  the  horse's  loins.  The  halter 
rein  is  grasped  firmly  and  held  in  the  left  hand.  By  making 
traction  on  end  of  rope  (c)  the  near  hind  foot  is  lifted  off  the 
ground  and  drawn  somewhat  to  the  off  side,  Eigure  166.  By 
traction  on  halter  rein  the  head  is  drawn  around  to  the  shoulder ; 
then  by  pressing  down  Avith  elbow  on  loins  the  horse  is  caused 
to  drop  down  on  his  haunches,  and  later  to  lie  down  on  the 
near  side,  Figure  167.  If  it  is  desired  to  secure  the  animal,  the 
same  can  easily  and  quickly  be  done  by  first  drawing  the  near 
hind  leg  well  forward  and  fixing  it  there  by  tying  main  rope 
to  collar  rope,  then  carry  the  rope  (e)  back  to  and  around 
off  hind  pastern,  draw  it  forward  and  fix  by  tying  to  collar  rope. 


CASTING   AND  SECURING   HARNESS  AND  ROPES.  143 


Fig.   166.     Second   Position    Russian   One    Man    Method  of  Casting  and 
Securing   a   Horse. 


Fig.    167.      Third    Position    Russian    One    Man    Method    of   Casting    and 
Securing   a    Horse. 


144 


RESTRAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Galvaynes  Method. 

First  apply  a  heavy  halter,  surcingle  and  crupper,  Figure 
168 ;  then  pass  a  strap  or  rope  through  the  side  ring  in  the  sur- 
cingle on  the  off  side — that  being  the  side  upon  which  the  horse 
is  to  fall;  the  strap  or  rope  is  then  passed  under  the  fore  arm 
of  the  off  fore  leg.  Tie  by  a  simple  bow  slip  knot  and  draw  it 
around  so  as  to  bring  the  bowknot  on  inside  of  fore  arm  and 
close  to  elbow.     The  object  of  this  strap  is  to  prevent  the  sur- 


Fig.   168. 


Galvayne's   One    Man    Method    of    Casting    and    Securing 
Horse — First  Position. 


cingle  from  slipping  around.  Now  fasten  one  end  of  the 
throwing  rope  to  the  second  ring  (b)  ;  from  the  front  on  the 
top  of  the  surcingle  pass  the  other  end  of  rope  through  the  near 
side  cheek  ring  of  halter ;  then  back  to  and  through  the  foremost 
top  ring  of  surcingle.  Tie  up  the  off  fore  leg  by  means  of  knee 
strap  or  rope  imtil  the  heel  touches  the  elbow  (a).  N'ow  you 
are  ready  to  cast  the  animal.     This  is  done  by  taking  the  halter 


CASTING  AND  SECURING   HARNESS   AND  ROPES.  145 


Fig.   169.     Galvayne's  One   Man   Method  of  Oasting  and   Securing  a 
Horse — Second  Position. 

rein  in  your  right  hand,  pushing  the  animal's  head  away  from 
you  as  far  to  his  near  side  as  possible,  and  at  the  same  time 
take  in  the  slack  of  the  throwing  rope  (d)  ;  step  back  about  6 
feet  and  steadily  draw  the  horse's  head  around  against  the  sur- 
cingle and  the  animal  will  gradually  lie  do\\Ti,      Should  the 


Fig.    170.      Galvayne's   One    Man    Method    of    Casting    and    Securing    a 
Horse — Third  Position. 


146 


RESTRAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


animal  attempt  to  rear,  slacken  the  throwing  rope  by  a  jerk  with 
the  left  hand  and  pull  on  halter  rein  with  the  right  hand, 
Figure  168. 

Figure  169  represents  the  horse  cast  ready  to  secure.  To 
secure  the  horse,  Figure  170,  the  double  side-line  ropes  are 
used.  Slip  loop  over  head,  down  around  base  of  neck;  then 
carry  ropes  (a)  between  fore  legs,  back  to  and  around  hind  pas- 
terns (e)  (d)  ;  fix  by  a  half  hitch,  then  carry  the  ropes  around 
and  under  animal.  ISTow^  fix  to  the  hind  pasterns.  The  rope 
from  near  hind  should  be  fixed  to  off  hind  and  vice  versa. 

Gleason's  Method. 

A  horse  can  be  cast  and  secured  by  the  method  of  Gleason 
with  a  halter  and  rein,  a  knee  strap  and  a  piece  of  rope  15  feet 
long.     Figure  171  represents  the  horse  ready  to  be  cast  (first 


Fig.   171.     Gleason's  One   Man    Method   of  Casting   and   Securing   a 
Horse — First  Position. 


CASTING  AND  SECURING   HARNESS  AND  ROPES. 


H7 


Fig.  172.     Gleason's  One   Man   Method   of  Casting  and   Securing  a 
Horse — Second  Position. 


V    11 


Fig.   173.     Gleason's  One    Man    Method   of   Casting   and   Securing   a 
Horse — Third  Position. 


148 


KESTEAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


position).  It  will  be  observed  that  the  operator  stands  on  the 
near  side  with  his  breast  pressing  firmly  against  thorax  of 
horse.  The  halter  rein  (f)  is  held  in  right  hand  (e).  The 
near  fore  leg  is  flexed  and  fixed  by  means  of  knee  strap  (d) 
(c).  A  loop  in  end  of  main  rope  is  placed  around  off  fore  pas- 
tern; then  passed  upward  (b)  and  held  in  right  hand  (h).  The 
horse  is  now  caused  to  move  and  the  rope  is  tightened,  which 
prevents  extension  of  off  fore  leg  and  puts  animal  down  on  its 
knees,  Figure  172.  The  head  is  now  drawn  around  to  side 
and  the  horse  topples  over  flat-sided,  Figure  173.  By  holding 
head  (e)  off  the  ground,  and  rope  (c)  tight,  the  animal  is  pre- 
vented from  regaining  its  feet.  If  more  restraint  is  desired  the 
hobbles  or  casting  harness  can  be  applied  and  used  for  that 
purpose. 

Magner's  Method. 

In  order  for  one  man  to  cast  and  secure  a  horse  by  the 
method  of  Magner,  a  special  harness  or  "rig"  is  necessary.  For 
this  purpose  Magner  has  designed  a  leather  "rig,"  Figure  174, 
and  an  improvised  rope  one.  Figure  175.  They  are  similar  in 
design  and  their  result  is  the  same.  The  only  difference  is  in  the 
material  used.     The  surcingle  of  the  leather  rig  should  be  3 


Fig.  174    Magner's  Leather  Casting  Rig. 


CASTING  AND  SECURING   HARNESS  AND  ROPES. 


149 


inches  wide,  double  and  stitched,  and  long  enough  to  apply 
around  the  horse.  It  is  best  to  have  a  double-tongue  buckle 
(i)  made  of  -wrought  iron.  To  this  surcingle  is  attached  the 
back  straps  (e)  (f)  bj  means  of  rings  (g)  (h).  To  these  back 
straps  the  crupper  (c)  (d)  is  attached  by  a  heavy  ring  (a).  To 
make  the  rope  rig,  Figure  175,  it  is  necessary  to  procure  18 
or  20  feet  of  %-inch  rope.  Make  a  simple  loop  about  3  inches 
long  at  one  end  (e)  and  double  the  rope  about  3  feet  from  the 
loop.  Pass  over  this  double  part  a  heavy  ring  3  inches  in 
diameter  (g).  Measure  the  distance  from  the  tail  to  where 
the  saddle  of  the  harness  fits;  to  this  place  bring  the  ring  (g) 


Fig.  175.    Magner's  Rope  Casting  Rig. 


and  fix  it  there  by  a  simple  knot  with  both  ropes  around  it  (h). 
N'ext  put  the  doubled  portion  of  rope  (a)  (b)  under  the  tail 
(c).  Xow  twist  this  rope  two  or  three  times  and  bring  the 
ring  to  its  place,  about  8  inches  to  the  right  of  back. 

Figure  176  represents  Magner's  leather  casting  rig  applied. 
Figure  177  represents  the  rope  rig  applied  and  in  action.  The 
near  fore  foot  is  raised  and  attached  to  body  girth  by  Magner's 
knee  strap,  Figure  33.  When  using  the  rope  crupper  it  is 
necessary  to  wrap  same  with  some  kind  of  soft  cloth  to  prevent 
chafing.  Xext  put  on  a  strong  halter  with  nose  band  well  down 
on  the  nose  and  draw  it  up  rather  close,  back  of  the  jaw.  Xow 
take  a  strong  cord  or  small  rope  20  feet  in  length  and  fasten  one 


I50 


RESTRAINT   OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Fig.  176.    Magner's  Leather  Casting  Rig  Applied. 


Fig.  177.     Magner's   Rope  Casting   Rig   in  ActioM. 


CASTING  AND  SECURING   HARNESS  AND  ROPES. 


151 


Fig.  178.     Magner's  Leather  Casting  Rig  in  Action — Horse  About  Ready 

to  go  Down. 

end  around  the  body  girth  just  above  the  ring.  Pass  the  other 
end  from  above  down  and  over  the  halter  strap  behind  the  jaw, 
thence  back  to  and  through  ring  in  body  girth  until  all  slack 
is  taken  up.     The  near  fore  foot  is  now  tied  up. 

In  casting  animals  by  this  method  it  is  advisable  to  have 
them  on  soft  gi-ound  free  from  stone.  Now  being  ready  to  cast 
the  horse,  step  a  little  to  the  right  and  almost  in  front  of  it, 
with  a  firm  grasp  on  the  cord  or  rope  make  gentle  traction  until 
the  head  is  drawn  down  and  backward  almost  against  breast. 
Figures  177  and  178.  This  unbalances  the  animal  and  causes 
it  to  fall  by  rolling  over  on  its  side.  Figure  179  represents  the 
horse  cast  with  the  rope  rig.  The  head  is  held  around  to  the 
side  to  prevent  rising. 


Fig.  179.     Magner's   Rope   Casting   Rig — Horse   Down   and   Head   Drawn 
Back  to   Prevent   Rising. 


152  EESTEAINT   OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 

Rarey's  Method. 

The  method  of  Rarey,  Figure  180,  is  similar  in  many  re- 
spects to  that  of  Gleason;  the  only  difference  is  that  Gleason 
applies  the  tripping  rope  to  one  fore  foot  and  Rarey  applies 
it  to  both  the  off  fore  and  the  off  hind  feet.  In  using  Rarey's 
method  a  knee  strap  is  applied  to  off  fore  leg  and  the  foot 
raised  against  the  elbow.     A  rope  is  then  attached  around  near 


Fig.  180.     Rarey's  One  Man  Method  of  Casting  a  Horse. 

fore  pastern  (a)  and  another  rope  around  near  hind  pastern 
(b).  A  surcingle  carrying  a  ring  (c)  is  applied  and  the  two 
leg  ropes  are  carried  through  this  ring  (c)  and  then  upward 
over  back.  The  operator  stands  on  the  off  side,  against  the 
horse.  The  head  is  draAvn  around  to  the  opposite  side  by 
means  of  halter  rein;  at  the  same  time  traction  is  made  upon 
both  ropes.  This  puts  three  legs  "out  of  commission"  and  the 
horse  falls. 


CASTING  AND  SECURING   HARNESS  AND  ROPES. 


153 


Restraint  of  Wild  and  Vicious  Horses. 

The  practitioner  of  veterinary  surgery  oftentimes  has  occa- 
sion to  subject  and  restrain  wild  and  vicious  horses — the  kind 
that  are  often  referred  to  as  "bronchos."  These  animals  kick 
behind  and  strike  viciously  in  front.  They  are  dangerous  to 
man,  and  to  subject  and  restrain  them  without  receiving  bodily 
injury  requires  considerable  tact  and  skill.  These  animals  are 
often  too  wild  and  vicious  to  even  allow  the  operator  to  put  a 
halter,  bridle,  or  twitch  on  them,  to  say  nothing  of  adjustment 
of  hobbles  and  casting  harness  around  their  legs  and  feet.  They 
must  be  cast  without  going  in  striking  or  kicking  distance  of 


Fig.  181.     Lasso  and  Loop  Rope  Method  of  Casting  a  "Broncho" — First 

Position. 


them.     There  are  several  methods  of  doing  this ;  however,  only 
three  of  them  will  here  be  illustrated  and  described. 

Figure  181  represents  the  lasso  and  rope  method  (first  posi- 
tion) of  casting  a  broncho.  The  lasso  is  cast  and  the  horse 
caught  by  a  loop  around  its  neck  (b).  The  lasso  rope  is  then 
carried  one  or  more  times  around  a  post  or  tree  (b)  (c).  Of 
course  during  this  time  the  horse  is  busy  in  his  struggling  efforts 
to  get  away;  however,  no  attention  should  be  given  to  that  part 
of  the  projposition.  A  loop  (a)  is  made  in  the  end  of  another 
rope  and  the  horse  allowed  or  forced  to  step  into  the  loop  with 


154 


EESTEAINT    OF    DOMESTIC   AjSTIMALS. 


Fig.  182.     Lasso  and  Loop  Rope  Method  of  Casting  a  "Broncho" — Sec- 
ond  Position. 


its  fore  feet,  after  which  the  loop  is  closed  around  the  pasterns. 
Figure  182,  by  making  quick  and  substantial  traction  on  the 
free  end  (h)  of  rope.  The  horse  will  continue  his  efforts  at 
resistance  for  a  short  while ;  however,  it  will  finally  become 
unbalanced  and  fall  flat-sided  to  the  ground,  with  its  head 
extended  by  traction  on  neck  rope,  Figure  183.  If  suffoca- 
tion is  threatened  the  neck  loop  (d)  may  be  relaxed.  The  hob- 
bles are  now  applied  and  the  animal  secured  in  the  usual  man- 
ner. 

Figure  184  represents  the  lasso  method  of  casting  a  broncho. 
This  method  is  used  when  a  tree  or  post  is  not  available.     The 


Fig.  183.     Lasso  and  Loop  Rope  Method  of  Casting  a  "Broncho" — Third 

Position. 


CASTING  AND  SECURING   HARNESS  AND  ROPES.  155 


Fig.   184.      Lasso   Method  of   Casting  a   "Broncho." 


!^k. 


Fig.  185.    Galvayne's  One  Man  Method  of  Casting  a  "Broncho." 


156  EESTKAINT    OF    DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 

lasso  is  cast  and  the  horse  caught  by  a  loop  around  the  neck  (a). 
The  rope  (b)  is  then  wrapped  two  or  more  times  around  the 
fore  legs  below  the  knee  (c)  (d).  This  pulls  the  legs  together. 
By  traction  (f )  on  free  end  of  rope  (e)  the  horse  is  unbalanced 
and  falls  from  the  effects  of  its  own  efforts  at  resistance. 

Galvayne's  "One  Man'  Method  of  Casting  a  "BroncJio." 

Figure  185  represents  the  method  of  Galvayne  for  casting 
a  broncho  by  one  man.  A  strong  halter  is  applied  and  the  halter 
strap  (e)  secured  to  a  post  or  tree  with  a  double  hitch  knot  (f ) 
so  that  it  cannot  slip  up  or  down.  jSTow  jerk  the  looped  end 
of  the  casting  rope  under  the  animal  towards  the  near  side. 
Take  the  other  end  of  the  rope,  walk  quietly  around  the  back 
of  the  animal  with  it,  and  pass  it  through  the  loop,  thus  making 
a  slip  loop.  Then  pull  the  end  of  the  rope  (c)  until  the  noose 
is  reduced  to  a  suitable  size  and  jerk  it  quickly  upward,  around 
both  hind  legs  above  the  hocks ;  then  draw  the  legs  close  together 
by  making  more  traction  on  free  end  of  rope  (c).  Stand  on 
the  near  side,  slightly  to  the  rear,  and  continue  to  pull  strongly. 
The  horse  will  kick  and  otherwise  resist  at  first,  but  will  soon 
sit  down  upon  its  haunches  and  subsequently  roll  over  on  its 
side.  The  horse  can  now  be  secured  with  the  casting  rope,  or 
hobbles  may  be  applied  for  that  purpose. 


CHAPTER  III. 

OPERATING  TABLES. 

As  a  means  of  restraint  in  the  recnmbent  posture,  the 
Equine  Operating  Table  occupies  an  important  position;  how- 
ever, the  operating  table,  as  with  the  stocks,  as  a  means  of 
restraint,  has  its  advocates  as  well  as  its  adversaries.  Some 
prominent  surgeons  of  this  and  other  countries  are  flattering 
in  their  praise  of  the  table,  while  other  practitioners  of  equal 
prominence  and  like  experience  are  severe  in  their  condemna- 
tion of  the  table  as  a  means  of  restraint.  Many  have  con- 
demned all  tables  in  general  without  subjecting  even  a  single 
one  of  them  to  a  fair  and  impartial  trial.  Others  have  con- 
demned all  tables  because  one  table  in  their  hands  chanced  to 
be  defective  in  design,  hence  unsatisfactory.  Some  practition- 
ers have  even  objected  to  the  table  because  it  is  stationary  and 
not  sufficiently  light  or  small  to  be  carried  with  them  from 
call  to  call.  Another  objection  is  the  inconvenience  or  impossi- 
bility of  putting  some  fractious  or  nervous  animals  on  the  table 
or  because  it  cannot  be  used  under  all  circumstances  and  condi- 
tions. They  even  dislike  it  because  it  occupies  too  much  space 
in  the  operating  room,  and  requires  two  or  more  assistants  to 
successfully  handle  a  large  and  strong  horse  on  account  of  the 
equine  operating  table  not  yet  being  a  "one  man"  affair. 

The  author  being  more  or  less  acquainted  and  familiar  with 
several  different  designs  of  operating  tables,  their  advantages 
as  well  as  their  disadvantages,  has  no  hesitancy  in  saying  that 
the  twentieth  century  practitioner  of  veterinary  surgery  cannot 
any  longer  afford  to  be  influenced  either  by  prejudice  on  the 
part  of  himself,  or  the  adverse  opinions  of  other  people,  to  de- 
prive himself  of  the  advantages  afforded  by  a  properly  con- 
structed and  modernly  equipped  equine  operating  table.  Such 
tables  are  now  manufactured  and  sold  at  reasonable  prices,  and 
their  use  and  value  to  the  surgeon  should  not  be  underestimated. 

Professor  Louis  A.  ^lerillat  says:  "The  greatest  advantage 
of  the  operating  table  in  this  connection  is  the  leisurely  manner 


158  RESTRAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 

with  which  an  operation  may  proceed  without  discomfort  to 
the  confined  horse,  and  the  decided  freshness  of  the  patient 
after  the  operation  is  over.  The  operating  table  does  not  often 
provoke  exhausting  struggles.  With  harness  restraint  the  pa- 
tient is  uncomfortable  throughout,  and  it  is  essential  to  hurry 
the  operation  in  order  to  shorten  the  duration  of  the  confine- 
ment. The  patient  always  arises  more  or  less  exhausted,  even 
from  short  operations,  while  w^ith  the  table  two  or  even  three 
hours  confinement  will  leave  no  exhaustive  effect.  In  short,  the 
horse  is  much  safer  on  the  operating  table  than  upon  the  floor 
secured  with  casting  harness.  From  the  standpoint  of  thor- 
oughness and  exactness  of  the  surgical  technique,  the  table  has 
both  good  and  bad  points.  The  operations  are  much  cleaner. 
There  are  no  flying  particles  from  the  litter  and  less  dust  in 
the  operating  place,  and  as  the  surgical  field  can  be  more  se- 
curely tied  there  is  much  less  danger  of  soiling  the  surgica' 
wound  and  a  much  better  opportunity  of  accurately  executing 
the  various  steps  of  the  operation.  The  dissection,  the  ha^mos- 
tasis,  the  suturing,  and  the  dressing  are  greatly  facilitated  by 
the  fixed  state  of  the  operating  field." 

Professor  W.  L.  Williams  says :  "We  could  not  consistently 
continue  the  use  of  the  table  in  daily  work  for  a  period  of 
nine  years,  side  by  side  with  the  various  kinds  of  casting  har- 
ness, following  the  exclusive  use  of  the  latter  during  seventeen 
years'  experience,  except  it  had  for  us  some  points  of  superior- 
ity in  cases  of  sufficiently  wide  range  of  character  to  warrant 
its  installation  and  retention.  Having  made  this  use  of  the 
table  and  after  a  long  study  of  its  practical  working,  with  so 
many  radical  changes  that  we  have  virtually  operated  four  or 
five  different  machines  and  studied  them  carefully,  besides 
temporarily  operated  upon  or  observed  the  actual  working  of 
an  equal  number  of  others  and  borrowed  therefrom  and  applied 
to  our  own  each  feature  commending  itself  to  us,  it  is  inevita- 
ble that  we  should  favor  the  one  with  which  w-e  are  most  fa- 
miliar." 

Professor  John  A.  W.  Dollar  says :  "The  advances  of  anti- 
septic surgery  and  the  invention  of  the  new  operating  machine 
have  placed  in  the  hands  of  veterinary  surgeons  a  means  of  over- 


OrERATING  TABLES.  I59 

coining  obstacles  hitherto  regarded  as  insurinonutal)le.  Be- 
tween these  two  factors,  however,  an  important  difference  ex- 
ists, inasmuch  as  while  we  all  recognize  with  a  fair  degree  of 
precision  the  requirements  and  capabilities  of  antiseptic  sur- 
gery, it  is  impossible  to  accurately  forecast  the  benefits  to  be 
obtained  from  a  new  means  of  controlling  animals  during  op- 
eration. In  important  operations  the  disadvantages  inherent 
to  the  old  method  not  infrequently  form  a  fatal  bar  to  success, 
or  even  to  experiment.  While  fully  recognizing,  therefore,  the 
immense  importance  and  possibilities  of  antiseptic  surgery,  I 
venture  to  predict  for  it  an  extended  scope  and  greatly  in- 
creased success  in  veterinary  operations,  since  its  application 
has  been  so  greatly  facilitated  by  the  invention  of  this  oper- 
ating table."* 

The  first  effort  at  devising  an  equine  operating  table  was 
made  by  Hoerdt.  This  apparatus  was  crude  in  design  and 
cumbersome  to  handle,  rendering  it  of  doubtful  value  as  a 
means  of  restraint.  This  machine  or  apparatus  of  Hoerdt  was 
soon  modified  and  improved  by  Fromage  de  Feurgre,  Kersting, 
Owen  and  others,  luitil  at  the  present  tinie  equine  operating 
tables  as  a  means  of  restraint  are  in  great  demand,  and  are  used 
by  most  of  the  prominent  surgeons  throughout  the  world. 

In  selecting  an  operating  table  we  should  carefully  consider 
the  following  important  facts  and  accept  that  apparatus  which 
possesses  the  most  points  of  excellence : 

1.  Strength. — Any  table  to  be  satisfactory  must  be  strong. 
The  wood,  ropes,  chains  and  straps  should  all  be  double  strengtli. 
One  weak  place  in  a  single  one  of  them  subjects  the  operator 
rnd  his  assistants  to  liability  of  great  bodily  injury. 

2.  Simplicity. — The  design  and  construction  should  be  as 
simple  as  possible.  However,  never  sacrifice  efficiency,  ease  of 
operation,  strength  and  safety  for  simplicity  or  appearance. 
Complicated   mechanical   constmction  was  for  many  years  the 


*  Author's  Note — Professor  Dollar  refers  here  to  the  table  orig- 
inated by  Vinsot,  later  improved  by  Dollar.  The  "Dollar  table"  has, 
during  recent  years,  been  improved  and  perfected  by  the  Bradwood 
Manufacturing  Company,  and  is  now  known  and  sold  in  America  as 
The  Bradwood  Equine  Operating  Table  and  Surgical  Chair. 


l6o  RESTRAINT   OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 

foundation  of  most  of  the  objectionable  features  of  the  equine 
operating  table,  but  these  have  to  a  large  extent  been  eliminated 
in  the  successful  table  of  today. 

3.  Ease  of  Operation. — A  successful  table  never  requires 
over  three  or  four  men  to  operate  it^ — even  when  handling  a 
large  and  strong  horse.  If  more  assistants  are  required,  some- 
thing is  wrong,  either  with  the  table  or  the  operator.  How- 
ever, as  a  general  rule,  we  should  beware  of  the  tables  that 
"can  be  lowered  to  the  horizontal  position  by  a  small  boy,"  as 
it  is  liable  to  require  the  combined  strength  of  two  or  more 
full  grown  men  to  put  the  table  again  in  the  upright  position 
and  the  animal  onto  its  feet.  A  table  should  possess  speed  as 
well  as  strength. 

4.  Thoroughness  of  Restraint. — A  table  should  be  so  con- 
structed and  equipped  that  the  restraint  is  thorough.  This 
places  the  operator  in  perfect  control  of  his  patient,  which  is 
in  itself  a  decided  advantage. 

5.  Safety  to  the  Patient. — A  successful  table  should  possess 
logical,  safe  and  efficient  means  of  placing  the  patient  on  the 
table  as  well  as  the  same  advantages  for  releasing  it  from  the 
table.  The  best  table  is  that  one  which  reduces  the  danger  in 
this  respect  to  the  smallest  possible  minimum. 

f).  Accessibility  of  the  Patient,  Especially  the  Field  of  Op- 
eration.— Tables  should  be  so  constructed  that  there  is  a  min- 
imum amount  of  obstruction  between  the  surgeon  and  the  oper- 
ative field.  The  hinderance  in  this  respect  should  be  reduced 
as  much  as  possible.  This  can  be  and  is  done  by  special  table- 
top  construction  in  the  shape  of  "cut  out"  or  removable  center, 
removable  head  piece,  cut  out  or  indented  sides,  etc. 

7.  Antisepsis  and  Asepsis. — The  table  should  be  so  con- 
structed that  its  thorough  cleansing  and  disinfection,  when  nec- 
essary, is  possible.  Sanitation  is  an  important  point  of  excel- 
lence in  favor  of  any  table. 

8.  Special  Positions. — The  time  has  come  when  special  posi- 
tions for  special  operations  are  necessary.  A  table  should  be 
so  constructed  that  it  affords  the  surgeon  the  widest  possible 
range  of  means  and  methods  of  restraining  the  animal  in  special 
positions. 


OPERATING  TABLES. 


i6l 


Possible  Accidents  to  Patient  in  the  Use  of  the  Oper- 
ating Table  as  a  Means  of  Restraint. 

Abrasions  and  contusions  about  the  head  and  bony  points 
of  the  body  occur  from  insufficient  padding  or  imperfect  re- 
straint. Or  they  may  occur  about  coronets,  pasterns  and  fet- 
locks from  the  hobble  straps  and  chains.  Fractures  of  one  or 
more  of  the  long  bones  sometimes  take  place.  This  is  also  liable 
to  happen  to  some  short  bones,  such  as  the  phalanges  and  verte- 
brae; especially  is  this  accident  likely  to  occur  in  old  horses  or 
in  those  suffering  from  one  or  more  of  the  various  bone  dis- 
eases, such  as  osteoporosis,  rickets,  etc. 

Sprain  or  rupture  of  tendons  and  muscles  is  not  an  infre- 
quent sequelae  of  operating  table  restraint. 

Dislocation  of  one  or  more  of  the  important  joints  is  an- 
other sequelae  of  no  rare  occurrence. 

Daviau's  Operating  Table. 

Daviau  designed,  made  and  used  the  first  equine  operating 
table  of  any  practical  value.  The  original  apparatus  of  Daviau, 
Figures  186  and  187,  was  a  large,  hardwood,  flat-top  table, 
the  top  (a)  being  6x8  feet. 


Fig.   186.     Daviau's  Operating  Table,   Upright  Position,  with  Animal 

Secured. 


l62 


EESTEAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


The  part  coming  in  contact  with  the  body  and  head  of 
the  horse  was  well  padded,  and  the  padding  covered  with  heavy 
leather.  Holes  (b)  (d)  were  made  for  passage  of  halter  rein 
(b),  neck  strap  (d),  hobble  ropes  (p)  (q),  and  body  strap  (n). 
The  table  top  was  equipped  with  body  girths  (e)  (f)  (g)  and 
horizontal  body  breeching  (m)  and  breast  straps  (o)  ;  also 
hobble  straps  (r)  (s),  and  ropes  by  which  the  animal  was  se7 
cured.  The  supporting  framework  of  this  table  was  2^  feet 
high  and  consists  of  four  strong  legs  with  substantial  braces  and 
cross  braces  between  them.      The  frame  work  so  arranged  that 


Fig.  187.     Daviau's  Operating  Table,  Horizontal  Position,  with  Animal 
Secured    Ready  for  Operation. 


when  the  table  is  lowered  by  means  of  the  cog  gears  and  crank 
it  acts  as  a  support  to  the  table  top.  Figure  187  represents  the 
table  top  lowered  to  the  horizontal  position,  with  a  patient  ready 
for  operation.  This  illustrates  the  body  girth  and  hobble  strap 
arrangement ;  also  shows  the  legs  and  frame  work  of  the  sup- 
porting platform. 

Daviau's  Opebating  Table  IxMpeoved. 

Finding  by  experimentation  and  practice  that  the  original 
table  possessed  several  objectionable  features,  viz.,  difficulty 
of  applying  and  tightening  the  straps  and  girths,  the  inaccessi- 


OPERATIXO  TABLES 


Fig.  188.    Daviau's  Table   Improved,   Upright  Position,   Back  View. 


Fig.  189.     Daviau's  Table,  Improved,  Upright  Position,  Front  View, 
Animal    Secured    Ready   to    Be    Lowered. 


164  EESTRAINT   OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 

bilitj  of  hobble  ropes  which  were  behind  and  underneath  the 
table,  etc.,  Daviau  designed  and  made  an  improved  table,  Fig 
ures  188  and  189. 

This  latter  table  is  quite  satisfactory  and  is  yet  used  in 
some  parts  of  France  and  Germany.  This  improved  table  is 
much  larger  and  more  complicated  than  the  original.  Figure 
188  represents  upright  position,  back  view.  It  shows  the 
manner  by  which  the  ropes,  straps  and  girths  are  fastened ;  also 
the  mechanical  construction  of  the  raising  and  lowering  device. 
Figure  189  represents  the  improved  table,  front  view,  upright 
position,  with  animal  secured,  ready  to  be  lowered  to  the  hori- 
zontal position.  It  will  be  observed  that  the  body  girths  are 
considerably  different  from  those  of  the  original  table. 

Coziee's  Improved  Equine  Opeeating  Table. 

The  improved  operating  table  of  Cozier  is  simple  in  con- 
struction, neat  in  appearance,  and  said  to  be  very  satisfactory 
by  those  who  have  used  it.  Figure  190  represents  front  view  of 
the  table  in  upright  position.  This  table  is  made  from  the 
best  Puget  Sound  fir  lumber.  The  top  of  the  table  (A)  is  about 
the  usual  size  of  veterinary  operating  tables,  being  seven  feet 
wide  by  nine  feet  long.  It  is  thoroughly  padded  and  covered 
with  canvas,  paraffined  and  oiled,  making  it  absolutely  water- 
proof, and,  as  near  as  possible,  aseptic. 

The  planks  are  2x12  inches,  doweled  together  and  bolted 
to  4x6  inch  cross  pieces  on  which  the  table  turns.  That  portion 
of  the  surface  (S)  on  which  the  feet  of  the  animal  are  secured  is 
covered  with  'No.  18  galvanized  sheet  iron,  amply  protecting  it 
from  the  kicks  and  cuts  of  shoes.  The  sheet  iron,  canvas  and 
bindings  are  all  nailed  on  with  galvanized  nails,  thus  avoiding 
the  action  of  rust,  and  adding  much  to  the  durability  of  the 
table. 

The  table  is  amply  supplied  with  hooks,  body  girths  (k) 
(q)  (r),  and  hobbles  (K)  (L)  (m)  (n)  for  securing  the  patient. 
The  adjustability  of  the  straps  makes  it  an  essentially  reversible 
table.  The  hobbles  tighten  automatically  after  buckling  on  the 
patient's  feet.     Long  body  girths  and  cams  are  furnished  only 


OPERATING  TABLES. 


165 


on  request.  Otherwise  the  table  is  fitted  with  short  body  girths 
(k)  (q)  (r)  and  ropes  (e)  (j)  (g)  running  through  rings  (b) 
(c)  (d)  at  the  end  as  shown  in  cut.  Dr.  Cozier  prefers  this 
method.  By  it  very  much  of  the  dirt  and  Avater  that  accumu- 
lates on  or  around  a  table  is  kept  from  coming  in  contact  with 
the  operator  or  patient  by  way  of  the  body  girths.  The  table  is 
furnished  with  three  body  girths  and  rings,  three  lifting  ropes, 


L 

Fig.  190.    Cozier's  Improved   Equine  Operating  Table,   Front  View. 

one  two-ply  oil  tanned  neck  strap  (h),  one  twenty-foot  side  line 
rope,  hobble  straps  and  irons  for  securing  the  frame  to  floor. 

Figure  191  represents  rear  view  of  the  Cozier  table.  The 
frame  (S)  is  built  of  4x6  inch  material  fitted  and  bolted  to- 
gether with  joint  bolts,  thus  allowing  all  parts  of  it  to  be  kept 
thoroughly  tight.  The  special  feature  of  importance  is  the 
gearing  (h)  (t)  (m),  which  is  Dr.  Cozier's  own  designing.  It 
is  unique  for  its  strength  and  simplicity.  The  power  is  applied 
to  the  table  top  at  two  points  simnltanooiisly,  doing  awny  with 


i66 


EESTKAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Fig.  191.  Cozier's  Improved  Equine  Operating  Table,  Rear  View- 
all  lateral  and  racking  motions,  and  is  transmitted  from  the 
crank  (K)  to  the  lifting  segments  by  means  of  a  worm  and 
worm  wheel,  thus  forming  a  lock  at  all  points  of  the  arc  through 
which  the  table  turns.  It  is  impossible,  therefore,  to  move  the 
table  up  or  down  without  turning  the  crank. 


Hodgson  and  Magee/s  Equine  Operaiing  Table. 

The  table,  Fig-ures  192,  193  and  194,  was  desig-ned  by  Drs. 
Hodgson  and  Magee.  It  is  simple  in  construction,  with  very 
little  mechanism  to  get  out  of  working  order.  The  particular 
difference  in  this  table  and  many  others  is  the  method  of  raising 
and  lowering  it  by  means  of  block  and  tackle,  which  is  anchored 
in  selected  positions  suitable  to  make  traction  at  certain  angles 
in  order  to  handle  the  hinged  table  top  which  rests  upon  a 
strongly  constructed  wooden  frame  or  base.     Another  important 


OPERATING  TABLES. 


167 


Fig.  192.     Hodgson  &  Magee's  Table,  Horizontal  Position. 

difference  between  this  and  other  tables,  except  the  Kyle  Bros, 
table,  is  the  manner  by  which  the  hobble  chains  are  tightened 
and  rendered  immovable.  Tigiire  192  represents  the  table  with 
its  top  (a)  lowered  to  the  horizontal  position.  It  will  be  ob- 
ser^'ed  that  the  frame  or  base  of  the  table  is  fixed  securely  to  two 


Fig.  193.     Hodgson  &  Magee's  Table,  Oblique  Position,  Side  View. 


i68 


EESTEAINT    OF    DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


flat  pieces  of  wood  (c)  (d)  which  rest  upon  the  floor.  Between 
these  two  flat  pieces  of  wood  are  two  braces ;  the  front  one  car- 
ries two  rings  (f)  (e)  into  which  the  hobble  chains  fasten,  and 
the  rear  one  carries  one  ring  (g)  into  which  the  lowering  pulley 
is  fastened.  The  table  top  is  made  of  hardwood  boards  substan- 
tially fastened  together.  Through  this  top  are  holes  to  accommo- 
date the  neck  strap  and  hobble  chains.     A  strong  metal  ring  is 


Fig.  194.     Hodgson  &  Magee's  Table,  Upright  Position,  Back  View. 

attached  on  upper  margin  of  table  near  its  middle  to  accommo- 
date pulley  rope. 

Figure  193  represents  an  end  view  of  the  Hodgson  &  Magee 
table  raised  to  its  oblique  position.  This  position  affords  the 
reader  a  comprehensive  view  of  the  strong  wooden  base  or  frame 
(e),  also  the  arrangement  of  the  body  girths  (f)  and  neck  strap. 

Figure  194  represents  a  back  view  of  the  table  top  (a)  raised 
to  the  upright  position.     It  shows  the  legs  and  turn-buckles 


OPERATING  TABLES.  169 

applied  on  each  side  to  render  the  table  stationary  and  solid; 
also  the  rope  and  pulley  arrangement  which  may  be  described 
as  follows: 

Directly  below  the  middle  of  the  superior  border  of  the  table 
on  its  posterior  face  are  two  heavy  wrought  iron  rings  (b).  At 
the  floor  into  the  wooden  cross  brace  or  sill,  another  ring  ( c ) 
is  fixed.  In  the  ceiling  is  another  ring.  This  ceiling  ring  should 
be  directly  in  line  with  the  ring  on  table  (b)  and  the  one  on 
the  sill  (c)  at  the  floor.  In  handling  this  table  two  systems  of 
pulleys  and  ropes  are  used.  One  pulley  is  attached  into  ring  on 
ceiling  and  its  rope  to  ring  on  the  table  top  (b).  Another  pulley 
is  attached  to  the  ring  on  the  sill  (c)  and  its  rope  attached  above 
to  the  low^er  ring  on  table  top  (b).  These  pulleys  will  allow 
the  table  to  be  raised  and  lowered  wuth  little  difficulty.  On 
account  of  the  hobble  chains  being  stationary  to  the  cross  brace 
at  the  bottom,  the  hobble  straps  are  automatically  tightened  and 
loosened  when  the  table  is  lowered  or  raised. 

The  Neiu  YorJc  State  Veterinary  College  Operating  Table. 

The  operating  table  which  was  recently  installed  by  Dr.  W. 
L.  Williams,  professor  of  surgery  at  the  Xew  York  State  Veteri- 
nary College,  and  known  as  "The  Xew  York  State  Veterinary 
College  Operating  Table,"  is  the  result  of  the  expense  of  much 
time,  thought  and  labor,  to  say  nothing  of  the  financial  outlay. 
A  similar  outfit  has  recently  been  manufactured  by  William 
Sellers  &  Co.,  Philadelphia,  Pa.,  and  installed  at  the  Univer- 
sity of  Pennsylvania  (Veterinary  Department)  under  the  direc- 
tion of  Dr.  John  W.  Adams,  Professor  of  Surgery  at  that  school. 

This  table,  with  that  manufactured  by  the  Bradwood  Manu- 
facturing Company  (to  be  described  later),  represents  the  result 
of  the  latest  and  most  up-to-date  thought  yet  applied  to  equine 
operating  table  construction.  With  such  machines  as  these  in 
the  reach  of  the  veterinary  profession,  little  can  be  said  and 
proven  derogatory  to  the  equine  operating  table  as  a  practical, 
useful  and  necessary  apparatus.  About  the  sole  argument  against 
them  is  the  one  of  price,  and  when  we  stop  to  consider  their 
cost  of  construction,  perfection  and  usefulness,  the  price  is  to  be 
considered  a  weak  argument  indeed  against  tlieir  installation. 


I70  KESTKAINT   OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 

The  ISTew  York  State  Veterinary  Operating  Table  is  made  of 
metal,  except  those  portions  upon  which  the  body  of  the  animal 
rests.  The  frame  work  is  built  of  steel  channels  and  I-beams 
securely  connected,  making  a  rigid  support  for  the  oak  and 
plate  steel  platform.  The  wooden  portion  of  the  platform  is 
made  in  three  pieces ;  a  main  section  and  two  smaller  inter- 
changeable square  pieces.  These  may  be  entirely  removed  or 
placed  in  suitable  positions  for  the  head  and  tail ;  that  intended 
for  the  head  being  slightly  inclined. 

Two  heavy  cast  iron  supports  are  provided,  having  their 
upper  ends  connected  by  hinged  joints  to  the  table,  and  upon 
these  the  table  rocks  from  vertical  to  horizontal  positions.  The 
movement  of  the  table  from  one  plane  to  another  is  accomplished 
by  a  hydraulic  cylinder,  bolted  to  the  foundation  through  a 
rocking  joint,  having  its  piston  rod  attached  to  the  under  side  of 
the  table  frame ;  by  admitting  water  to  either  end  of  the  cylinder 
the  piston  rod  can  be  moved  in  or  out  and  the  table  rocked  to 
the  desired  position.  When  the  table  is  horizontal  it  rests  on  two 
metal  posts  of  suitable  height,  which,  together  with  the  two  main 
standards,  give  four  points  of  support  whereby  all  tendency  to 
vibration  is  eliminated. 

Figure  195  shows  the  table  in  an  upright  position  ready  for 
use.  The  animal  stands  close  beside  it.  The  halter  strap  is 
passed  through  a  convenient  aperature  in  the  detachable  head 
piece  of  the  table  and  the  head  pulled  against  the  surface,  after 
w^hich  the  strap  is  tied  to  cleats  provided  for  the  purpose.  When 
this  is  done  the  girth-straps  and  foot  nooses  are  tightened,  the 
latter  being  accomplished  by  suitable  ratchet  windlasses  on 
the  under  side  of  the  platform.  If  required,  the  tail  may  be 
lashed  to  the  detachable  tail  piece. 

When  the  animal  is  thoroughly  secured,  the  table  may  be 
tilted  over  by  the  hydraulic  cylinder  until  it  lies  horizontally, 
or,  if  desired,  to  any  intermediate  angle,  where  it  may  be  sus- 
tained indefinitely. 

The  cylinder  is  double  acting,  and  so  controlled  by  a  valve 
as  to  be  positively  located  in  every  position.  Its  action  is 
smooth  and  free  from  all  undesirable  vibration.  A  small  triplex 
pump  driven  by  an  electric  motor  provides  the  water  supply.     A 


OI'KIIA  ri.\<;    lAlJI.KS. 


Fig.  195.      New  York   State   Veterinary  College  Table,   Upright  Position, 

Ready   for   Use. 


This  illiistr;itii)ii  >li()\\s  ;h1  jii>t;ilMlily  ot"  tlio  liniil  I'csrs.  the 
arraniiciiicnr  <it"  Ixidy  ;^irllis  jiihI  i'ojics,  the  ji-dn  jx.st  wliicli  siip- 
purt.s  the  tahlo  wlicii  in  horizniital  ])()sirit>n,  also  heavy  metal 
foot  pieces  at  hottom  of  tahle.  The  head  and  tail  rests  are  re- 
movable antl  interchangeal)le. 


172 


EESTEAINT    OF    DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Fig.    196.      New    York    State    Veterinary    College    Table    in    Horizontal 
Position,  with   Horse  Secured  to  Table   Ready  for  Operation. 


Observe  the  position  of  the  body  girths  and  rope,  also  the 
table  resting  firmly  on  the  two  metal  posts. 


<)l'i;i;AII\Ci   TAltLKS. 


173 


F;g.   197.      New  York  Stste  Veterinary  Collage  Table,   Upright   Position, 
with   Horse  Secured  to  It  After  Operation   Prior  to  Being   Released. 


T<t  release  rlie  liorse  the  Imlililc  ruiie-  arc  tirsi  reilnivcd  from 
the  feet.  The  iieek  straj)  is  removed  and  haher  rein  sliiihtly 
loosened,  after  whieh  inchiee  the  animal  to  stand  on  its  feet,  and 
lastly  release  hody  rope  .-md  izii'tli-. 


174 


EESTEAIiSTT    OF    DOMESTIC    AKIMALS. 


tr^   ^m       w 


/ 


A 


P,    .8 


:iw,'%^'i;. 


H-- 


l^- 


Fig.  198.     The  New  York  State  Veterinary  College  Table,  Front  View, 
With  Table  in  Upright  Position- 

(A)    Table  surface  of  ijolished  hard  Avood. 

(BB)    Lower  section  of  the  table  of  heavy  boiler  plate  iron. 

(C)  Detachable  central  section  composed  of  heavy  boiler 
plate  iron. 

(D)  Securing"  straps  or  bands  which  act  as  a  sling  beneath 
the  horse. 

(EE)  Openings  in  the  table  through  which  the  side  line  or 
longitudinal  strap  passes  in  confining  the  animal. 

(FF)  Adjustable  head  pieces.  The  one  on  the  right  is 
placed  at  the  highest  point,  while  that  on  the  left  is  attached 
lower  to  accommodate  smaller  sized  animals.  One  of  these  is 
depressed  as  is  shown  in  Figures  201,  202  and  203,  while  the 
other  is  direct. 

fITH)  The  foot  pieces  of  heavy  cast  iron  in  each  segment 
of  which  are  two  holes  for  the  passage  of  the  foot  ropes  as  shown 
in  Figure  201.  These  foot  pieces  are  rounded  and  project  above 
the  general  surface  of  the  table  sufficiently  to  have  a  space  be- 
tween the  lower  part  of  the  limb  and  the  table  surface. 


OPKRATTNG  TABLES. 


175 


176 


RESTRAINT    OF    DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Fig.  200.     New  York  Stats  Veterinary  College  Table,   Rear  View. 


(1)  The  hydraulic  jack  by  which  the  table  is  operated.  The 
1)11111])  from  which  the  jack  is  worked  is  located  along  the  wall  of 
the  rnoiii  and  connected  by  concealed  pipes. 

(J)    One  of  the  pedestals  npon  which  the  table  pivots. 

(L)  One  of  two  supports  upon  which  the  upper  portion  of 
the  table  rests  when  horizontal.  The  second  support  is  not  shown 
in  the  photogra])h. 


OPERATING  TABLES. 


Fig.   201.     New   York   State   Veterinary   Collegf 


'rm-iuMl  down  to  a  Imri/Diiial  |Hi>iiinii  with  tlu'  cciitor  piece 
rcniovcil  ami  (lriiii|M'(|  nprni  the  llnm-.  ami  the  i'<\\v  Innpcil  loot 
rojios  ill  position  in  tlic  font  jticccs  (1111).  Tlic  li'ttcriiiii;  is 
identical  Avitli  Fiiiiirc  r.»S.  Kadi  foot  ri.])c  is  slu.wn  passing 
tliruuiili  a  rafclicr  cylimlcr  liciiralli  the  talilc  This  cylimh-r  is 
operafcil  hy  means  of"  a  I'atchit  li'xcf. 


178 


KESTEAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Fig.  202.     New  York  State  Veterinary  College  Table. 


In  horizontal  position  with  an  animal  secured  in  position 
for  operating  for  roaring.  The  depressed  head  piece  is  used  and 
on  either  side  of  the  head  is  placed  a  flange-like  support  (K), 
forming  a  sort  of  groove  or  trough  in  which  the  patient's  head 
rests  securely.  The  dorsal  position  of  the  animal  is  maintained 
by  means  of  four  over-head  pulleys  acting  upon  the  feet.  It  is 
shown  that  three  assistants  are  in  an  available  position  for  aiding 
on  one  side  of  the  head  and  neck  and  an  equal  number  may  as 
readily  approach  the  part  from  the  opposite  side,  thus  showing 
that  it  is  freely  approaelial)le  from  any  direction. 


Ol'IiKATING  TABLES. 


179 


Fig.  203.     New  York  State  Veterinary  College  Table- 


Ill  the  same  position  as  Figure  201,  with  a  horse  confined 
in  position  for  cryptorchid  castration.  The  depressed  head  piece 
is  nscd  so  that  the  animal's  nose  is  lower  down  than  the  poll, 
rendering  chloroform  anaesthesia  more  safe.  The  central  piece 
is  romovcd  and  the  operator  stands  against  the  ventral  surface 
of  the  body  of  the  animal  l)otwcen  the  anterior  and  posterior 
limbs.  The  right  hind  liml)  is  drawn  upward  by  means  of  two 
overhead  pulleys  and  tlio  right  inguinal  region  is  thoroughly 
opened.  The  posterior  confining  strap  or  girth  marked  (D),  in 
Figure  198,  has  been  released  and  dropped  out  of  the  way  and 
the  position  of  the  patient  made  secure  by  fixing  the  tail  to  the 
upper  border  of  the  table.  It  will  be  seen  that  the  ventral  sur- 
face of  the  body  is  at  a  convenient  height  for  operating,  with 
operator  in  standing  position. 


i8o 


RESTItAI.XT    OF    DO^rESTIC    AA'IMALS. 


E 

^ 

(> 

<U 

i 

<u 

^ 

■> 

>% 

Ol'KIv'ATIXG  TABLES. 


OPERATING  TABLES.  183 

bj-pass  valve  is  provided  so  that  when  water  is  not  being  deliv- 
ered to  the  cylinder,  and  the  pump  still  running,  it  passes  back 
into  the  supply  tank. 

Figure  196  shows  the  table  in  an  horizontal  position,  with 
horse  secured  to  table  ready  for  operation.  The  middle  section 
of  the  lower  half  of  the  table  may  be  easily  removed,  permitting 
the  operator  to  stand  between  the  legs  of  the  animal. 

Figure  197  shows  the  table  in  the  vertical  position,  with  a 
horse  secured  to  it  after  the  operation,  prior  to  being  released. 
The  center  section  previously  referred  to  is  shown  removed. 

As  the  head  and  tail  extensions  are  removable  and  inter- 
changeable, the  animal  may  be  placed  upon  the  table  facing 
either  way. 

The  manipulation  of  the  operating  table  may  readily  be 
accomplished  by  the  surgeon  and  a  reasonably  competent  assist- 
ant. 

Figure  198  represents  the  table  in  upright  position — front 
view.  To  place  an  animal  on  this  table  the  head  is  supplied 
with  a  strong  halter  to  which  is  attached  a  15  or  20-foot  rein 
(rope).  This  rein  is  passed  through  the  eye  in  the  head  piece 
of  the  table  (F).  The  groom  handling  the  rein  can  step  entirely 
beyond  reach  of  the  animal  and  yet  hold  the  head  firmly  fixed 
against  the  table.  The  fixation  may  be  increased  by  carrying  the 
halter  rope  back  along  the  side  of  the  patient  and  passing  it 
through  the  table  at  "E,"  instead  of  the  side  strap  for  which 
this  opening  is  made;  by  traction  on  this  rope  the  animal's 
body  is  pressed  firmly  against  the  table.  The  horse  is  now  in 
position  where  the  operator  can  afiix  a  hobble  strap  or  rope  to 
off  fore  pastern.  This  is  passed  through  the  opening  "H," 
and  tied  by  an  assistant  to  prevent  the  animal  from  rearing. 
The  body  girths  can  now  be  applied  without  danger  to  the 
operator. 

The  table  with  the  patient  upon  it  can  now  be  promptly 
brought  to  the  horizontal  position  by  means  of  the  hydraulic 
pump,  with  the  operator  and  assistants  entirely  out  of  reach 
of  the  animal  in  its  struggles ;  and  once  down  the  restraint  can 
be  completed  without  coming  in  striking  reach  of  the  horse. 

Figure  199  represents  the  table  in  upright  position,  front 


184  RESTEAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 

view,  ready  for  reception  of  patient — hydraulic  pump  against 
wall  to  the  left. 

Figure  200  represents  the  table,  rear  view.  The  hydraulic 
cylinder,  or  Jack  I,  supplies  the  power  by  which  the  table  is 
raised  and  lowered.  This  is  a  strong  and  powerful  apparatus 
and  works  automatically.  The  largest  horse  can  be  handled 
without  any  effort  whatsoever  upon  the  part  of  operator  or  his 
assistants. 

Figure  201  represents  the  table  turned  down  in  the  hori- 
zontal position,  with  the  center  piece  removed  and  dropped  upon 
the  floor,  also  the  four  looped  hobble  ropes  in  the  metal 
foot  pieces,  H.  H.  These  ropes  each  pass  through  a  ratchet 
cylinder  beneath  the  table.  They  are  tightened  by  means  of  the 
ratchet  lever. 

Special  Positions. 

Animals  are  readily  placed  in  special  positions  for  certain 
operations  on  the  New  York  State  Veterinary  College  Table. 
Figure  202  represents  the  table  in  the  horizontal  position  with 
the  animal  placed  in  the  extended  dorsal  position  by  use  of  over- 
head pulleys.  It  will  be  observed  that  in  this  instance  the  animal 
is  under  chloroform  anaesthesia;  the  depressed  head  piece  is 
used,  and  on  either  side  of  the  head  there  are  flange-like  sup- 
ports (K).  These  hold  the  head  stationary.  This  illustration 
also  gives  a  comprehensive  idea  of  the  absence  of  obstruction 
between  the  animal  and  the  surgeon  and  his  assistants,  or  we 
might  say  the  accessibility  of  the  head  and  neck  from  the  front 
and  from  either  side. 

Figure  203  represents  animal  in  position  to  aiford  free 
access  to  the  scrotal  and  inguinal  regions.  On  account  of  the 
central  portion  of  the  table  being  removed  almost  every  part  of 
the  animal  may  be  easily  and  readily  approached  by  the  surgeon. 

Special  Metal  Platform  and  Padded  Recovery  Stall. 

ISTo  doubt  every  surgeon  has  experienced  the  worry  and 
vexation  of  attending  an  anaesthetized  patient  after  operation 
upon  the  table.     To  prevent  them  from  producing  self-inflicted 


OPERATING  TABLES. 


185 


injuries  or  doing  damage  to  the  operating  room  and  its  equip- 
ment requires  constant  attention  for  a  length  of  time  varying 
from  fifteen  to  forty-five  minutes.  To  obviate  this  difiiculty, 
Prof.  W.  L.  Williams  has  constructed  a  specially  padded  re- 
covery stall  adjoining  his  operating  room.  The  animal  is  simply 
slided  from  the  table  to  the  padded  recovery  stall  by  using  a 
metal  platform  shown  in  Figures  204  and  205.  When  once 
the  animal  is  in  this  stall  it  may  be  left  alone  to  recover 
without  injury  to  itself  or  trouble  to  the  surgeon  or  his  assistants. 


The  Chicago  Veterinary  College  Operating  Table. 

The  operating  table  which  is  used  at  the  Chicago  Veterinary 
College  is  a  flat  top  table.     This  table  possesses  several  decided 


Fig.  206.    Chicago  Veterinary  College  Table,   Upright  Position, 
Front  View. 


1 86 


RESTRAINT   OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


advantages  over  some  other  tables  of  the  same  type.  The  Chi- 
cago Veterinary  College  table  is  a  modification  of  the  original 
Dyson  table,  the  principal  modification  consisting  in  changing 
the  gears  from  eight  to  sixteen  turns  of  the  crank  to  elevate  or 
lower  the  table.  This  change  increases  the  power  by  decreasing 
the  speed;  however,  with  the  present  gears  the  table  possesses 
ample  speed,  and  one  man  can  easily  turn  the  crank  even  vv^hen 
a  heavy  horse  is  being  handled. 

Figure  206  represents  front  view  of  Chicago  Veterinary 
College  table  in  the  upright  position,  ready  for  reception  of 
patient.  The  top  of  the  table  is  made  heavy  and  strong  of  hard 
wood.     There  are  openings  to  accommodate  hobble  straps  (e) 


Fig.   207.    Chicago   Veterinary   College   Table,    Upright   Position, 
Rear  View. 


OPERATING  TABLES. 


187 


(f)  (g)  (li)  and  neck  strap  (r)  (p).  The  center  (o)  and  sides 
(i)  (j)  are  cut  out  to  allow  free  access  to  the  patient.  The  top 
is  padded  with  oakum  and  covered  with  painted  canvas.  The 
body  belts  (1)  (m)  (n)  are  of  5-inch  5-ply  cloth  belting,  and 
fasten  by  means  of  cam  buckles  near  top  of  table.  The  four 
hobble  straps  (e)  (f)  (g)  (h)  are  3-ply  harness  leather  of  a 
good  quality.  These  are  connected  to  chains  which  are  fixed 
stationary  to  the  frame  of  table.  This  table  is  elevated  and 
lowered  by  sixteen  turns  of  the  crank.  All  gearings  are  sub- 
stantial and  extremely  simple. 

Figure  207  represents  the  table  in  upright  position,  rear 
view.  The  frame  (a)  (b)  is  built  heavy  and  strong,  being  sup- 
ported at  each  corner  by  a  4x6-ineh  post  well  braced  in  all  direc- 
tions. On  the  end  of  the  crank  (c)  is  a  worm -gearing  by  which 
the  power  is  transmitted  to  the  main  cog  gear  (d). 

Figure  208  represents  the  table  in  horizontal  position. 


Fig.  208.     Chicago  Veterinary  College  Table,  Horizontal  Position. 


Directions  for  Placing  Patient  on  the  Chicago  Veterinary  Col- 
lege Table. 

Raise  table  to  upright  position,  then  induce  the  horse  to  stand 
alongside  table  and  near  enough  to  strap  body  to  it  by  means  of 
body  girths  and  hobble  straps.  To  accomplish  this  the  horse 
should  be  blindfolded.  iSTow,  the  halter  rein  should  be  passed 
through  opening  in  the  table  and  held  by  an  assistant.     The 


l88  KESTKAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 

foremost  body  girth  should  be  brought  around  the  animal  and 
fastened.  Then  fasten  the  neck  strap  and  the  remaining  two 
body  girths.  The  hobble  straps  may  now  be  placed  around  all 
four  pasterns,  after  which  re-tighten  the  halter  rein,  neck  strap 
and  body  girths  until  horse  is  firmly  against  the  table.  The 
hindermost  hobble  straps — ^both  fore  and  hind — must  be  buckled 
to  pasterns  of  the  outer  legs.  The  coronet  pastern  and  fetlock  of 
outer  hind  leg  should  be  protected  from  injury  in  struggling  by 
wrapping  with  a  bandage  or  heavy  cloth. 

Now  turn  the  table  down  to  the  horizontal  position  as  rapidly 
as  possible. 

To  release  the  horse  the  hobble  straps  are  removed  first,  then 
the  twitch  is  removed,  after  which  the  neck  strap  and  halter  rein 
are  loosened.  The  body  girths  are  at  this  time  loosened  several 
inches.  The  table  is  then  raised  to  the  upright  position.  The 
head  is  still  held  with  halter  rein  firmly  against  table.  The 
blindfold  should  be  removed  as  soon  as  animal  is  standing  on 
its  feet;  so  are  all  other  girths  and  straps  released  at  this  time. 

The  Conhey  Equine  Operating  Table. 

The  table  designed  and  used  by  Professor  L.  L.  Conkey, 
Figure  209,  is  of  the  flat  top  variety.  The  top  is  of  hard  wood, 
padded  and  covered  with  painted  canvas.  Openings  are  made 
through  the  top  to  accommodate  the  halter  and  neck  straps,  also 
hobble  chains.  This  table  has  the  center  and  sides  cut  out  to 
afford   free   access   to   the   patient.     It   is   equipped   with   two 


Fig.  209.     Conkey's  Equine   Operating  Table,    Horizontal   Position. 


OPERATING  TABLES. 


189 


strong  body  girths  (f)  (g).  These  are  made  of  heavy  cloth 
belting,  four  strong  leather  hobble  straps  (d)  (e)  (k)  (1)  at- 
tached to  chains  from  the  ratchet  by  which  they  are  tightened  by 
turning  the  crank  (n).  On  either  side  of  the  table  are  two 
heavy  iron  cranks  (b)  (c)  ;  by  turning  one  of  these  cranks  to  the 
left  the  table  top  is  raised  to  upright  position,  and  by  turning 
the  same  crank  to  the  right  the  table  top  is  lowered  to  the  hori- 
zontal position.  By  turning  the  other  crank  to  the  right  the  table 
top  is  reversed  (turned  upside  doAvn),  placing  the  patient  in  the 
dorsal  position ;  and  by  turning  the  same  crank  to  the  left  the 
table  top  is  again  brought  to  the  horizontal  position.  The  wide 
range  of  positions  is  an  attractive  feature  of  the  Conkey  table. 
Moreover,  the  table  top  rests  upon  a  heavy  metal  base  (a).  This 
base  is  equipped  with  turn-table  castings  which  enables  the  oper- 
ator to  turn  the  table  with  the  patient  on  it  in  any  direction, 
with  perfect  ease.  All  the  mechanical  parts  are  enclosed  in  the 
metal  base,  which  protects  them  from  dust  and  dirt. 


J  K 

Fig.   210.     Price's   Equine   Operating   Table. 


190  RESTRAINT   OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 

Price's  Equine   Operating  Table. 

The  Price  table,  Figure  210,  represents  one  of  the  earlier 
American  designs  of  operating  tables.  The  table  top  (a)  is 
9x6 I/O  feet,  heavily  padded,  and  covered  with  painted  canvas. 
This  top  is  made  of  hardwood  planks  two  inches  thick,  tongued 
and  grooved  to  match.  The  table  top  is  equipped  with  three  heavy 
canvas  body  girths  (c)  (d)  (e)  supplied  with  cam  buckles,  also 
four  hobble  straps  (h)  (g)  (i)  (f),  with  their  accompanying 
cams  and  two  neck  straps.  The  chains  are  attached  under  the 
table  to  a  ratchet  and  are  tightened  by  turning  the  self-locking 
crank  (j).  The  top  is  supported  by  a  heavy  stationary  wooden 
frame  (1).  This  frame  is  braced  in  all  directions,  and  on  that 
account  is  very  substantial.  The  table  top  is  lowered  and  raised 
by  turning  the  crank  (o)  in  the  rear. 

Price's  table  is  somewhat  antiquated  and  very  little  used  at 
the  present  time. 

Kyle  Bros.'  Comhination  Equine  Operating  Table  and  Stocks. 

The  table  top  of  Kyle  Bros,  is  made  of  2-inch  plank,  covered 
with  heavy  canvas  and  upholstered.  The  table  frame  is  made 
of  4x6-inch  lumber  and  put  together  in  a  bracing  manner  and 
will  never  rack. 

Figure  211  represents  the  table  in  upright  position,  front 
and  end  view. 

Figure  212  represents  the  table,  upright  position,  rear  view. 

At  the  rear  of  the  frame  is  situated  a  large  master  gear- 
wheel (f)  30  inches  in  diameter,  with  3-inch  face  and  140  cogs, 
which  is  always  in  engagement  with  a  small  3-inch  gear-wheel 
on  a  winding  shaft,  which  extends  the  full  length  of  table  so 
that  cranks  (a)  (f)  can  be  used  at  either  or  both  ends  of  the 
table,  operator  always  in  position  to  watch  the  animal  while 
tilting  the  table.  On  the  rim  of  this  master  gear-wheel,  at 
diametrically  opposite  points,  are  two  cranks.  To  one  of  these 
is  pivoted  the  lower  end  of  a  lever,  and  the  upper  end  of  this 
lever  is  pivoted  into  a  pair  of  lugs,  located  at  the  rear  edge  of 
the  tilting  table.  In  the  center  of  this  lever  are  disc-like  en- 
largements forming  a  hinge  (c)  provided  at  its  front  side  with 


OPERATING  TABLES. 


191 


Fig.    211. 


Kyle    Bros.    Operating   Table,    Upright   Position,    Front  and 
End    View. 


a  radical  slot,  which  lies  in  the  path  of  the  opposite  free  crank 
on  master  gear-wheel,  and  as  this  wheel  turns  around  the  free 
crank  enters  this  slot  in  hinge  and  springs  the  hinge,  which  is  so 
arranged  as  to  grasp  the  crank,  making  it  perfectly  safe  and  a 
direct,  quick  and  easy  lift  from  the  edge  of  the  table.  The 
platform  is  of  2-inch  plank,  9  feet  long  and  21/4  feet  wide,  well 
braced  underneath  with  strong  iron  bars  swung  with  large  30- 
inch  rods  to  a  hinge  shaft,  and  by  long  rods  to  each  end  of  the 
table;  then  by  unhooking  these  chains  the  platform  can  be  swung 
to  its  lower  position  while  operating  on  the  feet.    Horse  is  lifted 


192 


RESTRAINT    OF    DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Fig.  212.     Kyle   Bros.   Operating  Table,   Upright   Position,   Rear  View. 


by  the  feet  instead  of  the  girths,  making  it  much  easier  on 
the  animal. 

Figure  213  represents  the  table  in  upright  position,  with 
horse  attached  ready  to  be  lowered  to  horizontal  position.  The 
stocks  are  not  illustrated  in  cut ;  however,  they  are  made  of 
4x6  lumber  and  are  located  in  front  of  the  table,  the  padded 
table  raised  perpendicularly  answering  as  one  side.  The  sills  of 
stocks  are  attached  to  the  ends  of  the  sills  of  the  table  frame  and 
extend  forward  to  outer  edge  of  platform  where  the  posts  are 
attached,  which  are  7  feet  high,  well  braced  from  one  to  the 
other  by  a  beam  and  at  corners  by  strong  bolts. 

Animals  are  forced  into  the  stocks  by  a  swinging  (wooden) 
bar.  This  bar  swings  from  either  end  and  is  operated  by  a  rope 
attached  to  one  end  of  the  ratchet  shaft.  The  girths  and  ratchet 
ropes  are  then  applied,  which  prevents  lying  down  or  shifting 
about  while  making  examinations   of   the   mouth,    drenching, 


OPERATING  TABLES. 


193 


dressing  teeth,  or  performing  minor  operations  where  it  is  un- 
necessary to  cast  an  animal ;  also  convenient  in  holding  animals 
while  applying  girths  and  hobbles. 

When  the  stocks  are  added  to  table  it  is  not  necessary  for 
the  table  to  be  bolted  to  the  floor,  and  if  mounted  on  castors  it 
can  be  shifted  to  the  light  or  to  any  part  of  the  barn  by  the 
ratchet  ropes  and  shafts. 

Located  at  each  end  of  the  table  frame  are  two  ratchet 
shafts,  used  in  drawing  stubborn  horses  up  to  table  by  the  halter 
strap,  and  in  forcing  horse  around  against  the  table  by  passing 
a  rope  around  it  and  onto  one  of  the  ratchet  shafts,  which  is 
turned  by  a  crank.  This  table  is  supplied  with  neck  straps, 
girths,  fastening  for  halter  strap,  and  ropes ;  has  four  hobbles 
attached  to  heavy  chains  Avhich  work  automatically,  and  is  so 
arranged  that  the  slack  in  the  chains  can  be  taken  up  to  prevent 
them  from  being  caught  by  the  feet. 


Fig.   213.     Kyle    Bros.   Table,    Upright   Position,    Horse    Secured    Ready 
to    Be    Lowered    to   the    Horizontal    Position. 


194 


EESTKAINT   OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


The  stocks  are  8  feet  high,  but  can  be  easily  made  lower  if 
necessary.  A  table  can  be  operated  in  a  10x12  stall,  though 
12x12  is  better. 

This  table  is  also  arranged  for  shoeing.  A  5-inch  plank  can 
be  easily  removed  at  the  bottom  of  the  table,  giving  shoer  access 
to  the  feet,  while  feet  are  held  steady  by  ropes  and  the  ratchet 
shafts. 

Directions  for  Operating  the  Table. 

If  a  kind,  gentle  horse,  lead  him  up  close  to  the  padded 
side  of  the  table,  and  if  a  stubborn  horse,  pull  him  up  by  means 
of  the  rope  ratchet  shaft  and  force  him  around  to  the  table  by 


dl        e       a,      c  b 

Fig.  214.      Kyle    Bros.   Operating   Table,   Horizontal    Position,   with 
Horse  Confined   Ready  for  Operation. 

the  swinging  bar  of  the  stocks,  or  by  the  rope  and  ratchet  shaft, 
then  apply  the  girths  and  hobbles.  Take  up  the  slack  in  the 
hobble  chains,  then  proceed  to  tilt  the  table. 

Figure  214  represents  the  table  in  horizontal  position,  with 
horse  secured  ready  for  operation.  Observe  the  arrangement 
of  the  lash  rope,  body  girths  and  hobble  strap  chains. 

The  most  attractive  feature  of  the  Kyle  Bros,  operating 
table  is  that  it  is  possible  for  one  man  to  confine  and  place  a  full 
grown  horse  in  position  for  operation. 


OPERATING  TABLES. 

The  German  Equine  Operating  Table. 


195 


The  German  table  was  designed  and  first  used  by  Herr 
Trapp.  It  is  of  the  rocker  variety  and  is  yet  used  to  a  limited 
extent  throughout  Germany  for  casting  and  confining  oxen  as 
well  as  horses. 


Fig.  215.    German  Equine  Operating  Table,  Upright  Position,  Ready  for 
Reception  of  Patient. 

Figure  215  represents  the  German  equine  operating  table, 
upright  position,  ready  for  reception  of  patient.  The  table  top 
(k),  including  head-board  (j)  and  platform  for  the  feet  (a), 
is  made  of  hardwood  boards  2x4,  arranged  in  slat  fashion.  To 
place  an  animal  on  this  table  the  table  itself  is  raised  to  the 
upright  position.  Figure  215.     The  animal  is  then  led  upon  the 


196 


RESTRAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Fig.   216.     German    Equine   Operating   Table,   with    Horse   Secured 
Ready  for  Operation. 

platform  (a)  alongside  the  table.  The  head  is  fixed  to  head- 
board by  means  of  a  rope  or  strong  halter  strap.  The  body  is 
then  fixed  securely  to  table  with  lash  ropes.  The  table  is  then 
rocked  over  to  the  horizontal  position,  Figure  216 ;  then  the  feet 
are  secured,  after  which  the  horse  is  ready  for  operation. 

Figure  217  represents  the  table  in  horizontal  position.     The 
platform  or  foot  board  is  hinged  to  bottom  of  table.     The  head 


Fig.  217.     German   Equine  Operating  Table,  Horizontal  Position. 


OPEKATING    TABLES.  197 

piece  is  removable  and  interchangeable  and  can  be  placed  on 
either  side,  depending  upon  whether  the  horse  is  to  be  placed 
on  the  table  on  its  near  or  off  side. 

This  table  is  strong,  well  braced  in  all  directions,  light, 
cheap,  and  to  a  certain  extent  portable. 

Kansas  City  Veterinary  College  Rocker  Operating  Table. 

The  ^'Rocker  Table,"  Figure  218,  used  at  the  Kansas  City 
Veterinary  College,  is  one  of  the  flat-top  variety.  The  top  is 
made  by  wood  pieces  2x6  inches,  these  being  placed  crosswise  in 
slat  fashion.  These  pieces  are  each  padded  and  covered  sepa- 
rately with  painted  canvas.     The  head  piece  is  made  in  the  same 


Fig.  218.    Kansas  City  Veterinary  College  "Rocker  Table." 

manner  and  is  interchangeable  from  side  to  side  to  accommo- 
date each  side  of  the  horse.  The  top  is  equipped  with  eight 
hobble  straps  of  special  design;  also  hobble  strap  chains 
and  two  canvas  body  girths.  The  hobble  chains  are  tightened 
and  fixed  by  means  of  a  crank  at  the  end  of  table.  Two  hobble 
straps  are  applied  to  each  leg — one  around  pastern  and  the  other 
above  ankle.  The  body  girths  are  tightened  by  means  of  ropes 
which  attach  behind  the  table  when  in  upright  position.  The 
rockers  are  of  solid  wood  and  strong.  The  table  is  also  supplied 
Avith  a  foot  board  which  drops  off  as  soon  as  table  is  lowered 
to  horizontal  position. 

To  place  a  horse  on  this  table  the  table  itself  is  first  raised 


198  RESTRAINT    OF    DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 

to  upright  position.  The  animal's  head  is  fixed  to  head  piece 
by  using  the  halter  rein.  The  horse  is  now  placed  alongside  the 
table,  standing  on  the  foot  board  or  platform.  The  body  girths 
are  now  placed  around  the  body  and  fastened.  The  table,  with 
horse  attached  to  it,  is  now  rocked  or  turned  over  to  the  hori- 
zontal position.  The  feet  are  then  made  fast  by  the  hobble 
straps  and  the  body  girths  are  reinforced  by  a  lash  rope  extend- 
ing alongside  the  horse  and  fastened  at  each  end.  The  horse  is 
now  secured,  ready  for  operation.  To  release  the  animal,  first 
remove  hobble  straps,  then  the  lash  rope,  after  which  raise  table 
by  means  of  a  pulley  and  rope  to  the  upright  position.  As  soon 
as  the  animal's  feet  come  in  contact  with  the  floor  the  trip  is 
thrown,  which  releases  the  body  girths  instantly  and  allows  the 
animal  to  regain  its  feet  without  difficulty. 

The   Bradwood  Humane   Equine  Revolving   Operating   Table 

and  Chair. 

The  fundamental  principle  of  this  invention  belongs  to  M. 
Vinsot,  of  Chartres,  in  the  form  of  Vinsot's  Stocks,  Figure  67. 
This  apparatus  of  Vinsot,  in  the  form  of  stocks,  was  later  re- 
designed and  shaped  into  an  operating  table  by  John  A.  W. 
Dollar,  of  London,  and  has  long  been  known,  manufactured 
and  sold  in  England  as  the  "Dollar  table."  Several  years  ago 
the  apparatus  of  Dollar  was  brought  to  this  country  by  Frank 
G.  Atwood,  who  applied  for  and  was  granted  a  United  States 
patent  on  same.  Since  that  time  the  apparatus  has  been  changed 
in  several  important  mechanical  respects  under  the  direction  of 
H.  L.  Bradley,  and  as  now  manufactured  and  sold  by  the  Brad- 
wood  Manufacturing  Company — from  a  surgical  restraint  view- 
point— it  is  probably  the  most  perfect  and  desirable  horse-hand- 
ling machine  manufactured  in  the  civilized  world.  The  table  of 
today  weighs  only  one-half  as  much,  but  is  twice  as  strong,  as  the 
table  of  five  years  ago.  Instead  of  large  and  heavy  castings, 
strong  steel  forgings  are  substituted.  It  can  readily  be  con- 
verted into  a  surgical  chair  or  stocks.  The  table  itself  is  9  feet 
high,  12  feet  long,  3I/2  feet  wide.  It  requires  9  feet  to  turn  in. 
There  should,  of  course,  be  an  allowance  of  at  least  2  feet  on  all 


OPERATING    TABLES.  199 

sides  to  make  the  operating  of  it  easy  and  convenient.  This 
calls  for  a  room  14x16  feet  and  10  feet  high. 

Some  of  the  most  attractive  features  of  this  table  are  the 
ease  and  convenience  with  which  the  surgeon  may  approach  the 
patient  by  entering  the  table  from  the  back  side.  This  allows 
him  a  space  of  10  feet  long  by  5  feet  high  to  enter  the  table, 
whereas  in  all  other  tables  it  is  necessary  to  enter  from  the  side 
the  feet  are  attached  to. 

Another  advantage  is  that  of  the  table  being  used  for  a  sur- 
gical chair  after  operations,  as  previously  mentioned;  and, 
lastly,  the  labor  which  it  saves  the  veterinarian  is  a  large  item 
with  the  advantage  of  being  able  to  turn  it  to  the  right  or  left 
or  upside  do^\Ti.  Its  range  of  movement  is  far  greater  than 
that  of  other  operating  tables.  If  necessary  the  surgeon  and  one 
assistant  can  successfully  secure  a  large  horse  for  operation  in 
this  machine. 

Directions  for  Operating  the  Bradwood  Table. 

When  it  is  desired  to  secure  an  animal  therein,  one  or  more 
of  the  bars  is  freed  from  engagement  with  the  ears  of  either 
of  the  end  frames,  and  the  horse  or  other  animal  is  then  led  into 
the  frame,  after  which  the  bars  are  secured  into  position.  The 
sling  is  then  properly  disposed  about  the  animal  and  the  breast 
and  breeching  straps  tightened.  The  hobbles  are  then  secured 
around  the  ankles  and  the  winding  shaft  is  actuated  to  tighten 
the  chain  and  thus  securely  hold  the  legs  of  the  animal  against 
movement.  The  winding  shaft  is  next  actuated  through  the 
mechanism  explained  to  elevate  the  sling  and  lift  the  animal 
sufficiently  to  remove  the  feet  from  the  ground.  The 
animal  being  now  in  proper  position  to  be  thrown,  the  hand 
wheel  is  operated,  and  the  table  carrying  the  animal  is  swung 
either  to  the  right  or  to  the  left  and  gradually  lifts  the  feet  of 
the  animal  from  the  ground,  and  at  the  same  time  the  body 
will  be  caused  to  recline  upon  the  cushion  previously  adjusted 
and  positioned  together  with  its  auxiliary  attachment,  if  neces- 
sary in  the  operation  to  be  performed.  The  stay  chain  will 
obstruct  the  movement  of  the  cushion,  and  any  tendency  of  the 


200  RESTRAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMATES. 

cushion  to  turn  will  be  j)Ositively  obstructed  so  that  all  danger 
of  variation  in  the  position  of  the  animal  will  be  obviated. 

Means  will  also  be  provided  in  connection  with  one  or  both 
of  the  end  frames  for  attaching  halter  straps  or  other  head  har- 
ness and  great  care  will  be  exercised  in  the  formation  of  the 
several  parts  as  to  distances  apart  to  overcome  any  tendency  to 
injury  of  the  animal  during  his  retention  within  the  table.  It 
will  also  be  understood  that  the  animal  may  be  either  led  or 
backed  into  the  table,  and  after  the  operation  has  been  per- 
formed the  release  of  the  animal  is  pursued  reversely  to  the 
steps  just  described  in  securing  him. 

One  of  the  most  essential  features  of  the  present  invention 
is  the  mechanism  for  tilting  the  table  to  any  position  and  hold- 
ing it  locked  after  the  desired  adjustment  has  been  obtained. 
As  before  indicated  this  table,  together  with  the  attachments 
therein,  is  adjustable  either  to  the  right  or  left  and  fully  through 
a  circular  path.  It  is  obvious  that  under  the  control  of  certain 
actuating  mechanisms  the  table,  especially  after  an  animal  has 
been  placed  and  secured  therein,  would  require  considerable 
manual  strength  to  throw  or  position  the  animal  at  the  angle 
desired.  Consequently  it  is  imperative  from  a  standpoint  of 
facility  of  operation  that  the  necessary  concomitants  of  the 
mechanism  for  adjusting  or  operating  a  table  of  this  class  are 
that  they  shall  combine  great  strength,  ease  of  operation,  freedom 
from  damage  in  use,  and  positiveness  in  holding  the  table  at  any 
required  adjustment.  Mechanism  having  the  foregoing  re- 
quirements in  the  present  instance  consists  of  a  worm  wheel 
secured  to  the  pintle  and  held  in  constant  mesh  with  a  worm 
carried  by  a  shaft  having  bearings  in  opposite  brackets  on  the 
adjacent  standard.  The  shaft  is  journalled  in  suitable  ball 
bearings  to  reduce  the  friction  in  the  operation  of  such  shaft. 
When  a  horse  is  reclining  upon  either  of  the  cushions,  the  lateral 
thrust  against  the  threads  of  the  worm  will  be  excessive,  and  the 
provision  of  these  ball-bearings  reduces  the  resistance  to  move- 
ment of  the  shaft  to  a  minimum. 

This  invention  relates  to  veterinary  operating  tables  wherein 
a  frame  or  holding  means  is  movably  disposed  and  fulcrumed 
between  uprights  or  standard  devices  anchored  to  a  base  rest. 


OPERATING  TABLES.  20I 

The  present  form  of  table  is  equipped  with  attachments  to  facili- 
tate the  arrangement  of  the  animal  in  any  desired  position  for 
performing  surgical  and  shoeing  operations.  In  positioning  the 
table  carrying  the  animal,  the  labor  incident  to  such  operation 
is  reduced  to  a  minimum,  and  after  the  required  adjustment 
has  been  obtained  the  possible  movement  of  the  table  as  well 
as  injury  to  or  bodily  movement  of  the  animal  is  prevented. 
Furthermore,  the  table  is  of  such  open  construction  that  an 
operator  or  surgeon  may  enter  any  part  thereof  from  either  side 
or  end  close  to  the  body  of  the  animal,  to  easily  and  conveniently 
perform  the  necessary  operation.  The  improved  table  is  mov- 
able in  a  complete  circle  and  has  readily  operated  mechanism 
for  throwing  a  horse  over  on  either  side,  downwardly  at  an  angle 
with  the  hoofs  up,  or  fully  over  with  the  back  down  and  the  legs 
and  hoofs  in  a  vertical  position.  The  table  in  the  present  in- 
stance is  also  supplied  with  readily  adjustable  auxiliary  sup- 
porting attachments  which  in  part  are  specially  cushioned  and 
padded  to  serve  as  rests  for  different  portions  of  the  body  of  the 
animal,  and  easily  movable  from  one  position  to  another  with 
respect  to  the  opposite  ends  and  sides  of  the  table  to  accommo- 
date the  position  of  the  animal  and  assist  in  the  performance  of 
surgical  operations.  One  of  these  attachments  is  specially  useful 
in  holding  the  head  and  neck  of  an  animal  during  the  admin- 
istration of  an  anaesthetic,  or  one  limb  for  special  treatment  or 
operation.  A  part  or  all  of  the  attachments  may  be  used  in  the 
table,  and  in  addition  to  a  sling  of  ordinary  form  included  in  the 
complement  of  attachments  and  having  a  freely  movable  securing 
means,  other  supporting  harness  or  straps  may  be  introduced, 
particularly  when  the  table  is  so  arranged  that  the  legs  and 
hoofs  of  the  animal  are  turned  up  in  vertical  position.  These 
additional  supporting  straps  will  be  used  in  this  instance  to  re- 
move the  w^eight  strain  from  the  legs  of  the  animal,  which  under 
ordinary  conditions  are  secured  and  firmly  held  against  move- 
ment by  hobbles  attached  to  a  part  of  the  table.  The  possibility 
of  introducing  different  kinds  of  harness  or  straps  within  the 
table  is  an  important  advantage,  and  is  due  to  the  open  structure 
of  the  several  parts  of  the  table  and  the  adjustability  and  re- 
movabilitv  of  other  auxiliaries. 


202  EESTRAINT   OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 

It  will  be  observed  that  the  operator  has  free  access  to  any 
or  all  parts  of  the  animal  without  removing  the  patient  from 
the  table.  This  is  of  the  greatest  importance,  on  account  of  the 
danger  to  the  operator,  his  attendants,  and  patient. 

The  following  half-tone  illustrations  from  original  photo- 
gTaphs  will  give  the  reader  a  comprehensive  idea  of  the  range 
of  usefulness  of  this  machine : 


OPERATING    TABLES. 


203 


Fig.   219.     Bradwood    Operating    Table    in    Upright    Position    Ready 
for  Reception  of  the  Patient. 


It  will  be  observed  tliat  this  apparatus  can  be  used  for  stocks. 
For  operations  in  the  standing  posture  the  horse  can  be  placed 
either  forward  or  backward  by  shifting  the  iron  loops  on  the 
overhead  lengthwise  beam.  By  this  arrangement  operations  on 
posterior  parts  of  animal  can  be  performed  with  ease  and  safety. 


204 


RESTRAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Fig.   220.      Bradwood   Operating   Table   Open   for    Reception   of   Patient, 

Illustrating  Manner  in  Which  the  Slings  Are  Applied,  also 

Both    Side    Pads   on    Table   for    Double    Operation. 


lly  this  arrangement  the  u})erator  is  enabled  to  operate  upon 
one  fore  or  hind  leg,  or  one  side  of  the  body,  and  immediately 
turn  the  other  side  in  position  for  examination  or  operation 
without  releasing  the  patient. 


OPERATING    TABLES. 


205 


Fig.   221.     Bradwood    Operating   Table,    Side   View,    Illustrating    Method 
of    Removing    Patient  from    Apparatus    After   Operation. 


2o6 


RESTRAINT  OF  DOMESTIC  ANIMALS. 


OPERATING    TABLES. 


207 


Fig.  223.    Bradwood   Operating  Table. 


T\\v  horse  is  hacked  iiiln  tlie  tahh'  and  secured  in  the 
usual  iiianuer.  The  tahh'  is  then  tilted  slii;htl_v  to  the  riiiht. 
thus  placinii'  the  animal  in  ])roper  position  for  eve,  head,  mouth 
and  poll  operations.  It  demonstrates  how  easily  the  surgeon 
can  ])ass  out  from  tlie  hack  side  and  back  again  when  necessary. 
The  amount  of  s]>ace  for  ]»assage  de])ends  u])on  the  angle  of 
elevation  c^f  the  tal)le. 


2o8 


BESTICAI^TT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


OPERATING    TABLES. 


209 


Fig.    225.      Bradwood    Operating    Table,    Horse    in    Dorsal    Position    for 

Roaring   Operation,   and   Others   Where  the   Dorsal    Position    Is 

Desirable. 


To  place  a  horse  in  this  position  it  is  necessary  to  set  the 
overhead  iron  loops  back  one  or  two  notches.  This  places  the 
horse  entirely  inside  the  machine,  so  that  it  can  be  turned  com- 
pletely over. 


RESTKAINT    OF    DOMESTIC    ANIMALS. 


Fig.  226.     Bradwood  Operating  Table,   Horizontal   Position,   Legs   Fixed 
in  Position  for  Ope'aticn  on   Near  Hind. 


OPERATIXCr    TABLES. 


EESTEAINT    OF   DOMESTIC    ANIMALS. 


OrJOUATlA'G    TABLES. 


213 


4)     dj 
^   -J 


H  P 


-l->  4) 

to  Z 
o 

Q.  E 


I  O 


-"2 


2X4 


KESTKAINT    OF    DOMESTIC    ANIMALS. 


Fig.    230.      Bradwood     Operating    Table,     Horizontal     Position. 


This  shows  position  which  the  surgeon  can  take  in  per- 
forming foot  and  leg  operations.  In  entering  the  table  for  such 
an  operation  the  surgeon  enters  from  the  back  side  and  not  from 
the  side  on  which  the  feet  are  attached  to  the  chain.  This  allows 
a  space  for  the  surgeon  to  enter  10  feet  long  by  4:%  feet  high. 


OI'KRATIXG    TABLES. 


215 


Fig.    231.      Bradwood     Operating    Table,     Horizontal     Position. 


The  :iiiiiii:il  idaccd  for  (>|ici';i1  ioii  (Hi  the  fccf.  Tlio  hobbles 
can  readily  be  i'eiiiove(l  and  tbc  Icii  to  be  operated  on  attached 
to  chain  bracket,  wliich  IidMs  the  same  firmly  in  the  position 
required,  as  the  l)i-a('ket  is  adjustable  and  idlow  the  surgeon  to 
stand  outside  the  table  willi  llic  Ic^-  li,.],]  backwaril  or  foi-ward 
as  the  case  demands. 


PART  III. 


Restraint  of  the  Ox. 


PAKT  III. 

Restraint  of  the  Ox. 

The  object  of  restraint  of  the  ox  is  to  protect  the  operator 
iigainst  personal  injuries  as  a  result  of  kicking  as  well  as  goring. 
We  also  apply  means  of  restraint  for  the  purpose  of  immobil- 
izing the  animal  sufficiently  for  examination  and  operation. 
The  character  and  thoroughness  of  the  restraint  depends  entirely 
upon  the  location,  magnitude  and  painfulness  of  the  operation 
to  be. undertaken.  It  also  depends  to  a  certain  extent  upon  the 
size,  strength,  and  physical  condition  of  the  individual  animal 
and  the  number  and  ability  of  the  surgeon's  assistants.  In 
many  instances,  partial  restraint  in  the  standing  posture  will 
suffice,  while  at  other  times  complete  restraint  in  the  recumbent 
posture  becomes  imperative.  As  a  rule,  little  can  be  accom- 
plished by  gentleness  and  kindness  in  controlling  animals  of  the 
bovine  species.  Time  may  be  saved  and  much  vexation  avoided 
by  proceeding  at  once  with  whatever  restraint  method  it  has  been 
decided  to  use.  The  ox  is  extremely  susceptible  to  pain,  and  has 
a  tendency  to  actively  resist  as  soon  as  a  pain  of  any  character 
is  inflicted,  hence  the  necessity  of  prompt  and  efficient  restraint. 


CHAPTER  I. 

EESTKAINT  OF  THE  OX  IN  THE  STANDING  POSTURE. 

On  account  of  the  anatomical  conformation  and  tempera- 
ment of  the  ox,  the  modes  of  restraint  in  the  standing  posture 
vary  greatly  from  those  made  use  of  in  restraint  of  the  horse  in 
the  standing  position. 

Restmaint  of  the  Head. 

The  simplest  method  of  restraining  or  controlling  the  head 
is  to  firmly  grasp  the  lower  extremity  of  the  septum  nasi  (a) 
between  the  thumb  and  index  finger  of  one  hand,  and  the  horn 
(b)  with  the  other  hand,  FigTire  232.  By  a  tight  grasp  in  the 
nose  most  cattle  are  subdued  sufficiently  for  examination  and 
minor  operation.     Grasping  the  nose  of  the  ox  causes  pain  and 


Fig.   232.      Restraint   'by   Grasping    Septum    Nasi    with    One    Hand    an/d 
Horn  with  the  Other  Hand. 


RESTEAINT  OF  THE  OX  IN  THE  STANDING  POSTUKE.  221 

detracts  to  a  certain  degi'ee  the  animal's  attention  from  the  seat 
of  operation.  The  nose  grip,  either  by  hand  or  by  the  nose 
clamp,  has  the  same  effect,  from  a  restraint  viewpoint,  on  the 
ox  as  the  twitch  does  on  the  horse.  I 

Nose  Clamp. 

There  are  several  designs  of  nose  clamps ;  all  of  them  are 
made  of  metal,  and  when  applied,  all  produce  the  same  effect. 
They  are  useful  implements  of  subjection  and  restraint,  and 
should  be  applied  whenever  the  ox  is  to  be  secured  either  for  the 
purpose  of  examination  or  operation.  The  nose  clamp  is  useful 
in  the  recumbent  as  well  as  in  the  standing  posture.  The  fol- 
lowing illustrations  will  afford  the  reader  a  comprehensive  idea 
of  the  different  designs  of  nose  clamps  now  in  universal  use: 


Fig.  233.    American  Nose  Clamp 
with  Sliding  Metal   Keeper. 


Fig.   234.    American    Nose   Clamp 
With  Rope. 


EESTEAINT   OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Fig.  235.    Nose  Clamp  with   Spring 
and  Keeper. 


Fig.   236.     IModified   English    Nose 
Clamp  with  Keeper. 


Fig.    237.      Modified     English     Nose 
Clamp  with  Sliding  Metal  Keeper. 


Fig.  238.    German  Nose  Clamp  with 
Sliding   Ring  Keeper. 


RESTRAINT  OF  THE  OX  IN  THE  STANDING  POSTURE. 


223 


Fig.  239.    Italian   Nose  Clamp  with   Set   Screw   Keeper. 

Vigan's  Controlling  Apparatus. 

The  controlling  apparatus  of  Vigan,  Figure  240,  affords  us 
an  efficient  and  safe  method  of  iimnobolizing  the  head.  It  con- 
sists of  a  pole  of  sufficient  length  to  reach  from  the  withers  to  a 
point  about  twelve  inches  beyond  the  muzzle.  At  one  end  of 
this  pole  is  an  iron  staple  (d)  through  which  passes  a  strong 
surcingle  (e).  The  pole  is  then  fixed  between  the  horns  by 
means  of  a  rope  or  strap  (c).  The  distal  end  of  the  pole 
carries  an  iron  prolongation,  about  twelve  inches  from  the  end 
of  which  is  a  hook  (b).     This  hook  is  to  be  inserted  into  the 


Fig.   240.    Vigan's   Controlling   Apparatus. 


224  KESTKAINT   OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 

nose  ring.  On  the  end  of  this  iron  prolongation  is  a  large  ring 
by  which  the  head  is  controlled  by  one  hand^a).  This  appa- 
ratus is-  positive  and  severe  in  its  action,  and  the  most  vicious 
animals  are  quickly  subdued  and  controlled  by  its  application. 

Securing  the  Head  to  a  Post  or  Tree.^ 

Another  simple  method  of  securing  the  head,  Figure  241,  is 
by  looping  or  tying  a  rope  around  base  of  horns  (a),  after  which 


Fig.  241.    Head   Secured  to  Post. 


the  animal  is  forced  in  close  proximity  to  a  strong  post  (C)  or 
tree  around  which  the  free  end  of  the  rope  is  fixed  (B)  by  a 
simple  knot. 

Figure  242  illustrates  a  desirable  method  of  restraining 
the  head  by  means  of  a  rope  looped  around  base  of  horns  (a), 
after  which  it  is  carried  around  the  ear  (e)  (c)  in  a  half-hitch 
fashion.  Restraint  is  secured  by  tightening  the  rope  by 
traction  on  its  free  end  (b)  ;  this  causes  severe  pain,  and  the 
animal  quickly  responds. 


RESTRAINT  OF  THE  OX  IN  THE  STANDING  POSTURE. 


225 


Fig.  242.     Restraining  the   Head   by   Rope 
Around   Base  of  Horns  and   Ear. 


Leavitt's  Head  Holder. 

The  head  holder  of  H.  W.  Leavitt,  Figure  243,  is  intended 
to  be  used  in  connection  with  a  chute  or  stocks  which  were 
designed  by  the  same  inventor.  The  head  is  thrust  through  the 
opening;  the  lever  is  then  drawn  over  against  the  side  of  the 
neck  and  secured  there  by  means  of  an  iron  pin  thrust  through 
a  hole  behind  it.  The  rope  is  then  dropped  down  over  top  of 
neck  and  tightened  by  means  of  a  self-locking  ratchet  and 
windlass. 


Fig.  243.    Leavitt's   Head   Holder. 


226  RESTRAINT    OF   DOMESTIC    ANIMALS. 

Head  Tied  to  Post,  and  Tail  Through  Opening  Between 
Slats  of  Oate. 

Figure  244  represents  a  simple,  quick  and  effectual  method 
of  securing  cattle  in  the  standing  posture  for  "spaying"  and 
other  surgical  operations.  A  rope  is  looped  around  base  of 
horns  (a);  the  head  is  then  drawn  near  the  gate  post,  around 


Fig.  244.    Animal    Secured    by    Head   Tied   to   Post  and   Tail    Held 
Through  Opening  Between  Slats  of  Gate. 

which  the  rope  is  fixed  by  tying  (b).  The  tail  is  then  passed 
through  opening  between  the  gate  slats  above  the  animal  (c) 
and  there  firmly  held  by  an  assistant.  This  "tail  hold"  pre- 
vents the  animal  from  either  turning  around  or  lying  down. 

Restraining  the  Fore  Legs. 

The  fore  legs  of  the  ox  are  restrained  in  many  instances  by 
means  of  knee  straps  of  the  same  desigiis  as  those  used  in  re- 
straining the  horse.  Figures  245,  246  and  247  illustrate  knee 
straps  of  satisfactory  design : 


RESTRAINT  OF  THE  OX  IN  THE  STANDING  POSTURE.  227 


Fig.  245.    Hess'  Knee    Fig.  246.    Author's 
Strap.  Knee  Strap. 


Fig.  247.    Trasbot's 
Knee  Strap. 


Fig.   248.     Restraint  of  One   Hind    Leg. 


228 


RESTRAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Restraining  One  Hind  Leg. 

The  simplest  method  of  restraining  one  hind  leg  is  bj  means 
of  passing  the  tail  between  the  legs,  then  forward  and  around 
in  front  of  hind  leg  above  the  hock,  in  which  position  it  is  held 
firmly  by  a  backward  pull.  Figure  248.  If  the  animal  attempts 
to  kick  or  move,  traction  on  the  tail  will  cause  pain  and  prevent 
such  movement. 

Hoch  Twitch. 

The  hock  twitch,  Figure  249,  is  an  excellent  appliance  by 
which  one  hind  leg  may  be  restrained  to  prevent  kicking.  The 
rope  of  this  twitch  is  placed  around  the  leg  above  the  hock;  a 


Fig.  249.    Hock  Twitch. 

stick  is  then  thrust  through  the  loops  in  each  end  of  the  rope. 
The  rope  is  then  twisted  until  the  tendo- Achilles  is  pressed  down 
in  contact  with  the  posterior  face  of  the  leg.  This  prohibits  the 
animal  from  kicking  or  raising  the  leg. 


Fig.  250.     Hess'   IVlethod  of   Restraining   One   Hind   Leg. 


RESTRAINT  OF  THE  OX  IN  THE  STANDING  POSTURE. 


229 


Hess'  Method  of  Restraining  One  Hind  Leg. 

Hess'  method  of  restraining  one  hind  leg,  Figure  250,  con- 
sists of  securing  the  head  to  a  tree  or  post  by  means  of  a  rope 
looped  around  base  of  horns  (a).  The  hind  leg  is  then  drawn 
back  and  fixed  to  the  cart  standard  (d).      This  same  method  may 


Fig.  251.    Hess'  Method  of  Restraining  One  Hind  Leg  by  Fixing  to  Pole. 


be  used  with  the  same  degree  of  efficiency  by  substituting  a  tree 
or  post  for  the  cart  standard. 

Figure  251  represents  another  one  of  Hess'  methods  of  re- 
straining one  hind  leg  by  means  of  fixing  the  leg  (d)  to  a  pole 
(a)   (b)  which  is  placed  in  front  of  the  hock  (d).     The  leg  is 
fixed  to  the  pole  by  means  of  a  rope,  strap  or  cord, 
■s 


230  KESTBAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 

Restraining  Both  Hind  Legs  with  a  Rope  Tie. 

Figure  252  represents  Moussu's  method  of  restraining  both 
hind  legs  with  a  rope  tie.  The  rope  is  simply  looped  (d)  around 
one  hind  leg  above  the  hock  and  passed  backward  and  forward 
around  the  legs  (b)  (c)  above  the  hocks,  forming  a  figure  "8," 
after  which  fix  by  a  knot  (a)  between  the  legs. 


Fig.   252.     Restraining    Both    Hind    Legs   with    a    Rope   Tie. 


Fig.  253.   Smith's  Anti-Kicker. 


Smith's  Anti-Kicker. 

The    anti-kicker,    Figure 

253,  is  made  entirely  of  met- 

fd  al.        It  consists  of  two  flat 

spring    clamps    (a)     (d)    so 

shaped  as  to  fit  firmly  over 

the  Achilles  tendon.      To  one 

of  these  spring  clamps  one  end  of  the  chain  (b)  is  securely  fixed. 

The  other  spring  clamp  carries  a  locking  ring  (c)  to  receive 

and  lock  the  chain. 

Figure  254  represents  the  anti-kicker  applied.  This  makes 
a  convenient  and'  safe  hobble  for  the  hind  legs,  and  will  effect- 
ually prevent  kicking. 


RESTRAINT  OF  THE  OX  IN  THE  STANDING  POSTURE.  231 


Fig.  254.     Smith's  Anti-Kicker  Applied. 

Hess'  Method  of  Restraining  Both  Hind  Legs. 

The  method  of  Hess,  Figure  255,  for  restraining  both  hind 
legs  consists  of  doubling  a  rope,  webbing  or  strap,  and  placing 
it  around  one  hind  leg  above  the  hock  (b)  (c).  Pass  one  free 
end  up  between  the  hind  legs  and  through  the  loop,  and  the 
other  free  end  is  passed  in  front  and  around  the  other  hind  leg 
(a)  and  through  the  loop.  Traction  is  made  on  both  free  ends 
(d)  ;  this  draws  the  legs  together  and  prevents  backward,  for- 
ward and  side  wise  movement. 

Restraint  of  Both  Hind  Legs  with  a  Sack  or  Cloth. 

Figure  256  represents  restraint  of  both  hind  legs  by  means 
of  a  sack  or  cloth  folded  and  placed  in  front  of  the  hocks  (a) 
and  held  on  each  side  (b)  (c)  by  an  assistant. 


Restraint  of  Both  Hind  Legs  hy  Pole  in  Front  of  Hods. 

Figure  257  represents  both  hind  legs  restrained  by  placing 
a  pole  in  front  of  the  hocks  (A).  Each  end  (C)  (B)  of  this 
pole  is  held  by  an  assistant. 


332 


RESTKAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Fig.  255.    Hess'  Method  of  Restraining  Both  Hind  Legs. 


Fig.  256.    Restraint  of  Both   Hind  Legs  with  a  Sack  or  Cloth. 


RESTRAINT  OF  THE  OX  IN  THE  STANDING  POSTURE. 


233 


Fig.  257.      Restraint  of  Both   Hind  Legs  by  Pole  in   Front  of  Hocks. 


Restraint  of  Both  Hind  Legs  with  a  Plank  Held  by  an 

Assistant. 

Figure  258  represents  both  hind  legs  restrained  by  placing 
a  plank  in  front  of  the  hocks  (A)  with  one  end  down  against 
the  wall  (C)  and  the  other  end  held  by  an  assistant  (B).  By 
means  of  a  plank  held  in  this  manner  the  animal  is  forced  and 
held  against  the  wall  and  kicking  is  prevented  by  the  plank 
being  held  in  contact  with  the  hocks. 


Fig.  258.    Restraint  of  Both  Hind  Legs  with  Planl<  Held  by  One 
Assistant. 


234  KESTEAINT   OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 

Restraint  of  One  Hind  Leg  and  One  Fore  Leg. 

Fig.  259  represents  the  hind  and  fore  legs  fixed  together 
with  a  rope.  The  rope  is  looped  around  the  hind  leg  above 
the  hock  (a),  then  passed  forward  (b)  to  and  around  the  fore 
leg  (c)  (d)  above  the  knee  and  there  fixed  by  a  knot. 


Fig.  259.     Hind  and  Fore  Legs  Fixed  Together  with  a  Rope. 


Hess'  Method  of  Bestraining  One  Fore  Leg  and  One  Hind  Leg. 

The  method  of  Hess,  Figure  260,  of  securing  the  animal  to 
a  wagon,  consists  of  fixing  th-e  head  to  frame.  Then  lift  one 
fore  foot  (a)  with  rope  (b).  The  rope  is  then  passed  over 
frame  (c)  and  its  free  end  held  by  an  assistant  (d).  The 
hind  leg  is  fixed  (f)  to  a  pole  (g)  which  has  been  thrust  between 
the  spokes  of  wheel. 


EESTKAINT  OF  THE  OX  IN  TPIE  STANDING  POSTURE. 


235 


Fig.  260.     Hess'  Method  of  Restraining  One  Fore  and  One  Hind  Leg. 


Restraint  of  All  Four  Legs. 

Figure  261  represents  one  of  the  simplest  methods  of  re- 
straint of  all  four  legs.  It  consists  of  two  strong  rings  securely 
fixed  in  the  wall — one  in  front  (A)  and  the  other  behind  the 
animal  (C).  To  one  of  these  rings  a  strong  rope  is  fixed.  The 
rope  is  then  passed  alongside  the  animal  (B)  to  and  through  the 
other  ring  (C).  Traction  is  made  on  the  free  end  of  the  rope 
(D)  ;  this  forces  and  holds  the  animal  against  the  wall. 


Fig.  261.     Restraint  of  All    Four   Legs   by   Forcing   Animal   Against 
Wall   with    Rope. 


236 


RESTBAINT   OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Travis  or  Stocks. 

Figure  262  represents  a  form  of  stocks  now  in  general  use 
on  the  Continent  of  Europe  for  controlling  oxen.  The  four 
upright  side  posts  are  beveled  and  curved  to  fit  the  body  of  the 
animal.  They  are  attached  at  their  bottom  by  a  hinged  bolt  to 
posts  firmly  fixed  into  the  ground.  They  are  united  at  the 
top  by  keyed  pins  (c)  (a)  (b)  (d).  A  post  (e)  is  placed  in 
front  of  the  animal,  to  which  the  head  is  fixed  by  means  of  a 
rope  around  base  of  horns.  The  hind  legs  may  be  fixed  to  the 
rear  post  (f)  ;  the  fore  legs  are  fixed  to  support  (g)  on  front 
post. 


Fig.  262.    Travis  or  Stocks. 


Cattle  "Chute." 

Figure  263  represents  a  design  of  cattle  "chute"  which  is 
used  very  extensively  in  the  West  and  Northwest  for  confining 
wild  and  range  cattle  for  spaying  and  other  surgical  operations. 
This  "chute"  is  simply  a  wedge-shaped  stockade.  The  sides  of 
the  "chute"  are  six  feet  high  and  the  "chute"  itself  is  only  two 
and  one-half  feet  wide.  The  gate  (A)  is  eight  feet  high  and 
two  and  one-half  feet  wide.  The  sliding  bars  or  rails  (B)  are  to 
be  placed  behind  the  animal  to  prevent  backward  movement 
and  to  wedge  it  in  the  "chute."     The  head  is  thrust  through  the 


KESTKAINT  OF  THE  OX  IN  THE  STANDING  POSTURE.  237 


Fig.  263.    Cattle  "Chute 


opening  in  the  gate  (G).  After  the  operation,  the  animal  is 
released  by  simply  opening  the  gate.  This  "chute"  affords  ns 
a  quick,  safe  and  convenient  method  of  restraining  wild  and 
vicious  animals. 


CHAPTEK  11. 

RESTEAIJfT  OF   THE   OX  IN  RECUMBENT   POSTURE. 

The  OX  is  easily  cast  and  secured  for  oj)eration.  This  may 
be  done  with  most  any  of  the  ordinary  hobbles,  ropes  and  cast- 
ing harness  which  are  used  in  casting  and  restraining  the  horse. 
These  have  already  been  illustrated  and  described  in  Part  11. 

The  ox  may  also  be  secured  on  most  of  the  equine  operating 
tables  which  were  also  illustrated  and  described  in  Part  II. 
However,  there  are  a  few  special  methods  that  are  used  exclu- 
sively in  ox  surgery.  To  make  this  volume  complete,  it  will 
be  necessary  at  this  point  to  briefly  consider  the  special  appli- 
ances for  subjection  and  restraint  of  the  ox.  In  casting  and 
securing  this  animal  precautions  must  be  taken  against  fractur- 
ing the  horns  and  rupturing  the  rumen.  It  is  always  advisable 
to  have  the  animal  empty  by  fasting  several  hours  before  cast- 
ing, and  to  cast  upon  a  thick  bed  of  straw  or  other  soft  material. 
In  all  cases  the  head  should  be  supplied  with  a  halter,  or  the 
nose  clamp  may  be  used. 


Fig.   264.     Rueff's    Method   of  Casting  tlie   Ox — First    Position. 


KESTKAINT  OF  THE  OX  IN  ,;EEOUMBENT  POSTUEE. 


239 


Fig.  265.    Rueff's  Method  of  Casting  the  Ox — Second   Position. 

Rueff's  Method  of   Casting. 

The  method  used  in  Germany  by  Rueff,  Figure  264,  con- 
sists of  looping  a  rope  thirty-six  feet  long  around  base  of  horns 
(a).  This  rope  is  then  passed  along  on  top  of  neck  and  half 
hitches  taken  around  base  of  neck  (b),  chest  (c),  and  flank 
(d).  The  free  end  is  then  carried  backward  over  the  hip  (e) 
and  with  one  assistant  controlling  the  head,  traction  is  made  on 
free  end  of  rope  sufficient  to  compress  the  body,  and  in  a  few 
seconds  the  animal  will  lie  down,  at  which  time  the  restraint 
may  be  completed  by  application  of  hobbles. 

Figure  265  represents  the  animal  about  ready  to  go  down. 
Figure  266  represents  the  animal  cast,  ready  to  be  secured. 


Fig.  266.    Rueff's   IVlethod   of  Casting   the   Ox — Third   Position. 


240 


RESTRAINT   OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Figure  267  represents  a  quick  and  convenient  method  of 
casting  calves  for  "spaying  operation."  Two  ropes  are  simply 
looped  around  the  hind  and  fore  legs  (a)  (b)  above  the  ankles, 
and  the  calf  is  stretched  broadsided  on  the  ground  by  making 
traction  on  the  free  ends  of  the  ropes  (c)  (d). 


Fig.  267.     Casting  Calves  for  "Spaying  Operation." 

Soffners  Method  of  Casting. 

The  method  of  Soffner,  Figure  268,  consists  of  a  forked 
rope,  both  ends  of  which  are  passed  under  the  chin  strap  of  the 
halter,  then  carried  between  the  fore  legs  (f),  thence  to  and 
through  the  ring  (b)  in  surcingle  (g),  then  the  two  ends  are 
looped  around  each  fore  leg  above  ankles  (a)  (c).  The  animal 
is  cast  by  making  traction  on  free  end  of  rope  (e). 


Fig.   268.    Soffner's   Method   of  Casting. 


KBSTRAINT  OF  THE  OX  IN  KECUMBENT   POSTURE. 


"Draw  Back"  or  "Pulley  Harness. 


241 


The  "draw  back"  or  "pulley  harness,"  Figure  2G9,  were  orig- 
inally designed  for  preventing  cattle  from  "running  away." 
However,  it  later  developed  that  they  are  also  desirable  for 
casting  purposes.  A  rope  surcingle  carrying  two  pulleys  is 
fastened  firmly  around  the  chest  (d).     Hobble  straps  are  ap- 


Fig.  269.     "Draw  Back"  or  Pulley  Harness. 

plied  around  both  fore  pasterns.  The  main  rope  is  fijied  to 
hobble  strap  ring  (a)  of  off  pastern.  The  rope  is  then  carried 
upward  to  and  through  the  pulley  (b),  thence  downward  to  and 
through  the  hobble  strap  ring  on  near  fore  leg  (e)  ;  then  upward 
to  and  through  the  remaining  pulley  (c).  Traction  is  made  on 
free  end  of  rope  (f). 


Conkey's  Lock  Buckle  Hobbles. 

The  lock  buckle  hobbles  of  Conkey,  Figure  270,  are  very 
convenient  for  casting  and  securing  the  ox.  The  hobble  straps 
are  buckled  around  the  legs  above  ankles.  The  master  hobble 
(a)  is  applied  to  near  fore  leg  when  it  is  desired  to  cast  animal 


242 


RESTRAINT    OF  DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Fig.   270.     Conkey's   Lock   Buckle    Hobbles   Applied. 

on  off  side.  The  rope  carrying  tlie  chain  is  passed  from  near 
fore  to  and  through  hobble  strap  ring  of  near  hind ;  then  across 
to  off  hind ;  thence  forward  to  off  fore,  and  back  through  lock 
buckle.  The  animal  is  cast  and  secured,  Figure  271,  by  mak- 
ing traction  on  free  end  of  main  rope. 


Fig.  271.   Animal  Cast  and  Secured  with  Conkey's  Lock  Buckle  Hobbles. 


RESTRAINT  OF  THE  OX  IN  RECUMBENT  POSTURE. 


243 


Casting  unth  Rope  on  Three  Legs. 

Figure  272  represents  a  mode  of  casting  with  rope  on  only 
three  legs.  The  rope  has  a  running  noose  or  loop  at  one  end 
which  is  placed  around  the  near  fore  pastern  (a)  then  carried 
around  off  fore  pastern  (b),  thence  around  off  hind  pastern  (c) 
and  back  around  the  part  of  the  rope  connecting  the  fore  legs. 
The  free  end  of  the  rope  (e)  is  passed  backward,  and  the  ani- 
mal is  cast  by  two  or  more  assistants  making  traction  on  rope. 


Fig.   272.    Casting   with    Rope   on   Three   Legs. 


Casting  Ropes  Fixed  to  Horns. 

Figure  273  represents  the  manner  of  casting  an  animal  with 
main  casting  ropes  fixed  around  base  of  horns.  Take  a  %  or 
•yj-inch  rope  fifty  feet  long ;  double  the  rope  and  loop  its  middle 
around  base  of  horns  (a).  The  free  ends  are  brought  down  on 
either  side  between  the  fore  legs  behind  elbows  (b)  ;  then  back- 
ward (c)  (d)  to  and  around  each  hind  pastern  (h)  (i)  ;  thence 
forward  (e)  (f),  and  the  animal  is  cast  by  traction  on  free  ends 
of  the  ropes  (j)  (k).  If  available,  it  is  advisable  to  use  hobble 
straps  on  hind  legs  above  the  ankles. 


244 


RESTRAINT   OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Fig.   273,    Casting   Rope   Fixed  to   Horns. 


Fig.  274.     Casting   by  Double  Side   Line. 


BESTKAIAT   OF   THE   OX  IN   KECUMBENT   POSTUKE. 


245 


Casting  by  Double  Side  Line. 

Figure  274  represents  the  ox  being  cast  by  means  of  the 
double  side  line.  The  rope  used  should  be  %-inch  in  diameter 
and  fifty  feet  long.  A  loop  is  made  in  middle  of  main  rope 
sufficiently  large  to  fit  around  base  of  neck  (a),  side  loops  (k) 
are  made  in  this  collar  loop  for  passage  of  free  ends  of  main 
rope.  From  the  breast  each  main  rope  is  passed  between  the 
fore  legs  and  backward  (f)  (g)  to  and  around  each  hind  leg 
above  ankles  (d)  (e)  ;  thence  forward  (h)  (i)  to  and  through 
side  loops  (k)  in  collar.  The  animal  is  cast  by  traction  on  free 
ends  (b)  (c)  of  the  two  main  ropes. 


Fig.  275.     Knowles'  Web  Casting  Harness  Applied. 


Knowles'  ^Yeb  Casting  Harness. 

The  web  casting  harness  of  Knowles,  Figure  275,  is  an 
excellent  appliance  for  casting  the  ox.  This  harness  has  already 
been  fully  described  in  Part  II,  hence  it  is  unnecessary  to  re- 
describe  it  here.  It  will  be  observed  that  the  webbing  hobbles 
are  applied  above  ankles  in  casting  the  ox,  otherwise  the  harness 
is  applied  and  used  as  in  casting  and  securing  the  horse. 

Figure  27 G  represents  an  ox  cast  and  secured  with  the 
Knowles  web  casting  harness. 


246 


RESTRAINT    OF    DOMESTIC    ANIMALS. 


Fig.  276.    Animal   Cast   and   Secured   with    Knowies'   Web   Casting 

Harness. 


Fixing  the  Legs  to  Pole  After  Casting. 

Figure  277  will  afford  the  reader  a  comprehensive  idea  of 
one  method  of  fixing  the  legs  to  a  pole  after  casting.  With  the 
animal  thns  secured,  it  can  be  placed  in  the  dorsal  position 
with  little  difficulty. 


Fig.  277.    Fixing  tiie   Legs  to  Pole  After  Casting. 


PART  IV. 


Restraint  of  the  Dog. 


PAKT  IV. 

Resteaint  of  the  Dog. 

In  restraining  the  dog  for  either  examination  or  operation, 
care  must  be  exercised  to  avoid  injury.  By  rough  handling, 
the  animal  is  liable  to  receive  both  external  and  internal  inju- 
ries ;  by  improper  or  imperfect  restraint  the  operator  is  liable 
to  receive  personal  injuries  as  a  result  of  bites  from  the  animal. 

Some  animals  are  very  active  in  their  efforts  at  resistance, 
while  others  are  docile  and  easy  to  manage.  It  is  always  advis- 
able to  apply  some  form  of  muzzle  before  proceeding  far  with 
any  examination  or  operation.  It  only  requires  a  few  mo- 
ments' time  to  apply  a  muzzle,  and  it  will  oftentimes  relieve  the 
surgeon  of  the  embarrassment  of  caring  for  and  treating  severe 
punctured  and  lacerated  wounds,  or  in  many  instances  resorting 
to  Pasteur  treatment.  Especial  care  must  be  exercised  in  hand- 
ling nervous,  fat  and  aged  animals,  also  those  of  the  smaller 
breeds,  on  account  of  their  susceptibility  to  injur  v. 

The  quickest,  as  well  as  the  safest,  method  of  handling  a 
dog  is  to  promptly  and  firmly  grasp  the  skin  of  the  nape  of  the 
neck.  But  in  very  large,  savage  and  dangerous  dogs  the  risk 
of  personal  injury  to  the  operator  can  be  greatly  minimized 
by  seizing  them  with  a  long  pair  of  collar  nippers  or  tongs.  In 
the  absence  of  nippers  or  tongs  an  improvised  "catcher"  may  be 
<[uickly  made  by  procuring  a  stick  four  or  five  feet  in  length, 
rhrough  the  end  of  which  two  holes  are  bored.  Through  these 
holes  a  piece  of  wire  or  cord  is  carried,  forming  a  running  noose 
at  the  end  of  the  stick.  Standing  at  a  distance  from  the  ani- 
mal this  noose  is  placed  over  the  head  and  the  wire  or  cord 
tightened.  An  appliance  of  this  kind  holds  the  dog  at  a  safe 
distance  until  more  secure  restraint  can  be  applied. 


CHAPTEK  I- 


OPERATING  TABLES. 


In  order  to  intelligently  and  hnmanely  manipulate  the  opera- 
tive technique  of  canine  surgery,  the  surgeon's  operating  room 
must  of  necessity  be  equipped  with  some  form  of  operating  table. 
This  particular  form  of  operating  room  equipment  does  not 
present  itself  as  a  question  of  choice,  but  confronts  us  as  one 
of  absolute  necessity.  To  make  most  tables  complete,  there  are 
two  important  adjuncts  with  which  they  must  be  equipped,  viz., 
hobbles  and  operating  trough.  There  are  many  different  designs 
of  hobbles ;  however,  the  Dawson-Erench  hobbles  and  those  of 
Hobday  have  proven  themselves  in  actual  practice  to  be  far 
superior  to  all  others. 


Dawson-Frencli  Hohhles. 

These  hobbles.  Figure  278,  were  designed  and  perfected  by 

Doctors  Charles  F.  Dawson 
and  Cecil  French.  The 
Dawson-French  hobbles  are 
admirably  adapted  to  canine 
use.  The  main  feature  of 
the  hobbles  is  their  self-lock- 
ing action.  A  swinging- 
ratchet  arrangement  is  sus- 
pended in  a  frame  through 
which  the  control  rope  passes. 
The  frame  is  supplied  with  a 
screw  clamp  by  means  of 
which  it  is  attachable  to  and 
removable  from  any  operat- 
ing table  at  will.  One  set  of 
four  large  and  one  set  of  four  small  running-noose  leg  bands 
are  provided.  These  will  fit  any  sized  animal,  and  are  con- 
nected to  the  control  ropes  by  steel  snaps.      Should  the  operator 


Fig.  278.    Dawson-French  Portable 
Hobble. 


OPERATING    TABLES. 


251 


wish  to  tighten  the  control  rope  he  does  so  by  merely  pulling  on 
it,  and  the  moment  he  lets  go  it  is  firmly  clinched  by  the  ratchet. 
The  animal  can  be  quickly  released  from  the  control  position  at 
any  moment  by  simply  holding  back  the  handle  bars  by  which 
the  ratchet  is  prevented  from  cliiicliing,  tliis  allows  h\'c  ])assage 
for  the  rope. 


Fig.   279.     Hobday's    Hobbles. 

Hobday's  Hobbles. 

The  hobbles  of  Hobday,  Figure  279,  consist  of  a  clamp  (a) 
carrying  a  set  screw  (g)  by  which  it  is  securely  fixed  to  the 
corners  of  any  operating  table.  The  top  of  this  metal  clamp 
carries  a  small  rope  or  cord  (b),  upon  the  free  end  of  which 
if-  a  specially-constructed,  selfdocking  loop  (e),  carrying  a  metal 
ring  (f)  to  which  the  webbing  hobble  strap  (d)  is  attached  by 
means  of  a  snap  (e).  These  hobbles  are  portable,  and  can  be 
quickly  and  easily  ap])li(Ml  to  and  removed  from  any  operating 
table.     They  are  ap})li(Ml   I)y   looping  the  webbing  hobble   (d) 


Fig.  280.     Ordinary  Table    Equipped  with    Hobday's   Hobbles- 
Dog    Secured. 


252 


RESTRAINT    OV   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


The  slack  is  taken 


above  the  elbows  and  hocks  of  the  patient. 
up  by  the  sliding  self -locking  device  (c). 

Figure  280  represents  an  ordinary  flat-top  table  equipped 
with  Hobday's  hobbles.  The  patient  is  secured  in  the  extended 
abdominal   position.      Observe   the   position   of   the   clamps    at 


Fig.  281.     Ordinary  Table   Equipped  with   Hobday's   Hobbles — 
Dog    Secured. 


corners  of  table,  the  hobble  straps  applied  and  the  self-locking 
device  on  each  hobble  rope.  Figure  281  represents  the  same 
patient  placed  in  the  extended  dorsal  position.  (The  author 
much  prefers  to  place  the  hobble  loops  on  the  fore  legs  above 
the  elbows  and  hocks.) 


Fig.  282.    Improvised  Cord   Hobble   Loop. 


Improvised  Cord  Hobble  Loop. 

The  improvised  hobble  loop,  Figure  282,  is  made  by  doubling 
a  piece  of  cord,  tape  or  webbing  so  as  to  make  a  slip  noose  or 
loop  in  the  center.  The  hobble  ropes  may  be  fixed  at  each 
corner  to  the  legs  of  any  ordinary  table. 


OPERATING    TABLES. 


253 


Fig.  283.    Key  Hobble  Looped 
Ready  for  Application. 


Key  Hohhle. 

Figure  283  represents  the  key  hobble.      The  keys  for  this 

hobble  are  made  of  brass  or  other 
metal  having  a  shoulder  or  ri'm 
just  underneath  the  head  (B)  of 
the  keys  to  prevent  them  from 
pressing  too  far  into  the  wooden 
top  of  the  table.  The  hobble  con- 
sists of  a  piece  of  tape,  leather  or 
webbing  passed  through  the  ring 
(B)  on  the  key,  the  two  ends  be- 
ing stitched  together.  In  order  to 
use  this  key  hobble  it  becomes  nec- 
essary to  have  key  holes  cut  into 

the  table  top  at  intervals  of  about  three  inches.     (See  Hobday's 

table,  Figure  289.)  • 

Young's  Operating  Trough. 

The  operating  trough  of  Young,  Figure  284,  is  a  valuable 
adjunct  to  most  operating 
tables.  It  is  useful  in  drain- 
ing off  the  fluids  as  well  as 
holding  the  patient  in  a  sta- 
tionary position.  This  trough 
sets  flat  on  the  table  and  is 
made  of  enamelled  iron.  It 
can  be  readily  rendered 
sterile  by  boiling  or  by  cleansing  with  any  of  the  ordinary 
disinfectants. 

FigTire  285  represents  the  extension  grate  which  is  used  for 
the  same  purpose  as  the  operating  trough.  This  appliance  is 
depressed  in  its  center  and  provided  with  a  slat  floor  (a).  It 
readily  fits  the  top  of  any  operating  table. 

Bernard's  Operating  Table. 

The  table  of  Bernard,  Figure  286,  is  an  ordinary  flat-top 
table  (a)  provided  with  an  operating  trough  (b)  and  a  head- 


Fig.  284.    Young's  Operating  Trough. 


254 


RESTRAINT    OF    DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


b  >> 

Fig.  285.     Extension   Grate. 


Fig.  287.     MacQueen's  Operating  Table. 


OPERATING    TABLES. 


255 


holding  device   (c)    (g).     Bernard's  table  is  used  very  exten- 
sively in  France  and  Germany,  and  is  quite  satisfactory. 

MacQueen's  Operatiuij  Table. 

The  table  of  MacQueen,  Figure  287,  is  similar  in  many 
respects  to  that  of  Bernard,  Figure  2S(').  In  fact,  this  is  a 
nioditication  of  the  Bernard  apparatus.  It  is  made  of  v.ood, 
consisting  of  four  parallel  leaves  connected  by  hinges.  The 
two  outer  leaves  may  be  inclined  at  any  angle  toward  one  an- 
other, forming  a  trough  to  receive  the  animal's  body.  When 
folded  it  is  readily  portable. 

Ordinary  Metal  Flat-Top  Table. 

The  table.  Figure  288,  is  an  ordinary  metal  table  of  the 
flat-top  stationary  variety.      This  table  is  finished  in  cmamel, 


Fig.   288.     Metal    Table    with    Enamel    Finish. 


which  makes  it  extremely  easy  to  cleanse  and  render  sterile. 
AVhen  equipped  with  hobbles  it  makes  a  very  desirable  table  for 
ordinary  purposes. 

Tlohday's  Operating  Tahle. 

The  table  of  Hobday,  Figure  289,  is  made  of  wood.     It  is 
provided  with  a  strong  wooden  base  (i)  of  the  cross-leg  variety. 


256 


KESTKAINT    OF   DOMESTIC    ANIMALS. 


Fig.  289.    Hobday's  Operating  Table. 

At  each  end  is  a  receptacle  (f)  (g)  (h)  for  instruments  and 
solutions.  The  top  (e)  is  perforated  with  key  holes  and  is 
supplied  with  key  hobbles  (a)  (B)  (c)  (d),  which  are  adjust- 
able to  any-sized  animal. 


Fig.  290.    Livon's  Operating  Table. 


OPERATING    TABLES. 

Livons  Operating  Table. 


257 


The  table  of  Livon,  Figure  290,  is  made  of  wood,  and  is  of 
the  stationary  flat-top  variety.  The  top  (a)  is  perforated  to 
allow  escape  of  fluids,  and  is  attached  to  a  substantial  base 
consisting  of  eight  legs  (b)  (c)  (d)  (e)  placed  cross- wise  under 
the  table. 

C.  A.   White's  Operating  Table. 

The  table  designed  and  used  by  C.  A.  White,  Figure  291, 
is  made  entirely  of  metal,  with  white  enamel  finish.     The  top 


Fig.  291.    C.  A.  White's  Operating  Table. 

(i)  and  drain  shelf  (k)  are  made  of  sheet  steel.  The  legs 
(c)  (d)  (e)  (f)  are  of  tubular  iron.  The  basin  holders  (g) 
are  of  round  steel  rods  and  may  be  attached  to  either  corner  of 
the  table.  This  table  is  mounted  on  heavy  castors,  and  is  five 
feet  long,  two  feet  wide,  and  three  and  one-half  feet  high. 


German  Operating  Table. 

The  German  operating  table.  Figure  292,  is  made  with  a 
wrought-iron  frame  and  heavy  plate  glass  top  (a).  The  frame 
is  white  enamel  finished,  which  makes  the  table  as  aseptic  as  it 


258 


EESTKAINT    OF    DOMESTIC    ANIMALS. 


Fig.   292.    German   Operating  Table. 


Fig.    293.     Italian    Operating    Table. 


OPEKATINO  TABLES. 


259 


is  possible  for  it  to  be.  The  table  is  supplied  with  an  instru- 
ment basin  (e)  and  a  solution  basin  (b),  and  is  mounted  on 
castors. 

liallan   Operaliug  Table. 

The  Italian  operating  table,  Figure  293,  is  made  entirely 
of  metal,  the  frame  being  tubular  and  the  top  of  sheet  steel. 
This  tabic  is  equipped  with  castors  (b)  (c)  (d)  (e).  When 
in  the  desired  position  the  lever  (g)  is  thrown,  which  displaces 
the  castors  and  allows  the  table  legs  to  come  in  direct  contact 
with  the  floor  this  renders  the  table  more  solid  and  stationary. 


Fig.   294.     Delahanty's    Folding    Table — Horizontal    Position. 


26o 


EESTKAINT    OF   DOMESTIC    ANIMALS. 


Delahantys  Folding  Operating  Table. 

The  folding  table  of  Delahanty,  Figure  294,  is  very  conven- 
ient where  the  operating  room  space  is  limited.  This  table 
consists  of  a  single  wide  board  top  (a)  attached  at  one  end  by 
two  hinges  (g)  (h)  to  the  wall  (g)  (h).  The  other  end  is  sup- 
plied at  each  corner  with  two  hinged  legs  (i)  (j).  Five  oblong 
openings  are  made  through  the  top  (b)  (c)  (d)  (e)  (f).  These 
are  to  receive  the  four  legs  and  nose  of  the  dog.  This  table  is 
especially  convenient  for  "ear  trimming,"  as  it  holds  the  dog 
perfectly  motionless.  The  legs  are  thrust  through  the  holes 
(b)   (c)   (d)   (e)  and  tied  together  underneath  the  table.     The 


mwm^^. 


Wm 


h/>'  ?■ 


' 


'Or, 


Fig.  295.     Delahanty's  Folding  Table  Secured  Against  the  Wall. 


OPEKATING    TABLES. 


261 


nose  is  thrust  through  the  front  hole  (f)  and  secured  underneath 
the  tahle  with  the  muzzle  tape. 

Figure  295  shows  the  table  from  the  underside  and  repre- 
sents it  folded  back  and  fastened  against  the  wall.  Observe  the 
hinged  legs  folded  down  against  the  table  top  and  the  button 
fastening  (g)  on  wall,  which  holds  tlie  table  up.  When  thus 
folded,  the  table  is  entirely  out  of  the  way. 

German  All-Metal  Revolving  Tahle. 

The  German  table,  Figure  20(i,  is  made  entirely  of  metal,  and 
is  adjustable  in  most  all  particulars.  The  frame  consists  of  four 
legs  (b)  (c)  (d)  (1),  braced  at  the  bottom  (a).  These  braces 
merge  together  at  the  top  against  the  center  post  (h).     This  post 


Fig.   296.     German    All-Metal    Revolving    Table. 


262 


RESTEAINT    OF  DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


carries  the  mechanical  parts  of  the  table.  These  parts  consist  of 
a  cog  (s)  and  lever  (f)  device  by  which  the  table  is  lowered  or 
raised  to  any  desired  height,  a  ball  and  socket  device  (f )  which 
allows  the  table  to  revolve  or  be  turned  in  any  direction  or  ele- 
vated to  any  angle.  The  top  consists  of  three  short  metal 
leaves  (m)  (n)  (o).  These  are  perforated  with  numerous 
holes  to  allow  fluids  to  escape.  The  ones  on  either  side  are 
hinged  to  that  of  the  middle,  and  are  easily  raised,  lowered, 
and  locked  at  any  angle  by  the  self-locking  ratchets  on  each  end 
of  the  table.  They  can  even  be  dropped  down  to  the  sides  and 
animal  placed  on  the  table  in  the  astride  position. 


b       i 


c        = 


Fig.  297.    Stuttgart  Operating  Table. 


OPERATING  TABLES. 


263 


Stuttgart  Operating  Table. 

The  Stuttgart  table,  Figure  297,  consists  of  an  ordinary 
wooden  table  with  metal  top  to  which  is  attached  by  suitable  fast- 
enings the  four  metal  legs  of  the  Stuttgart  apparatus.  These  legs 
support  the  two  leaves  (a)  (a)  of  the  hollow  metal  top.  By  a 
special  arrangement  the  top  can  be  lowered  either  at  sides  or  in 
the  center,  which  makes  it  in  many  particulars  an  adjustable 
table. 


Fig.   298.     Improvised    Operating    Table — Horizontal    Position. 


Improvised  Operating  Table. 

The  improvised  operating  table.  Figure  298,  is  made  from 
an  ordinary  sewing  machine  stand.  The  metal  parts  are 
painted  with  aluminum  paint.  The  top  (i)  is  of  solid  wood 
painted  with  white  enamel  paint.  The  top  is  hinged  at  one 
end  (h)  and  the  other  end  is  supplied  with  hinged  brace  rods 
(g)  which  fit  into  ratchet  notches  (j)  on  the  metal  frame  (d). 
By  means  of  this  arrangement  the  top  can  be  elevated,  Figure 
299,  to  any  desired  angle.  This  table  is  cheap,  neat,  clean  and 
efficient. 


264 


KESTRAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Fig.  299.    Improvised   Operating   Table — Upright   Position. 


CHAPTER  II. 


MUZZLES,    TAPE    AND    OTHER    METHODS. 


Muzzles. 


To  avoid  being  bitten  the  surgeon  should  take  the  wise  pre- 
caution of  applying  some  means  of  restraint  to  the  mouth  before 


Fig.  301.     Tape  Muzzle  Properly  Applied. 


Fig.  300.     Clove   Hitch   Muzzle. 


an  examination  is  made  or  an  operation  performed.  The  best 
and  safest  mouth  restraint  is  some  form  of  muzzle.  The  ordi- 
nary clove  hitch,  FigTire   300,  made  of  either  cord,   tape  or 


Fig.  302.    Tape   Muzzle   Held 
by  an  Assistant. 


Fig.  303.    Leatlier  Strap  Muzzle 
Held   by  an   Assistant. 


266 


EESTKAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


leather,  and  applied  around  the  jaws  in  such  manner  as  to 
close  the  mouth  and  keep  it  closed  with  bow  tie  back  of  the 
poll,  makes  an  excellent  muzzling  device.  Figure  301  repre- 
sents the  tape  muzzle  properly  applied. 

As  a  simple,  temporary  precaution  in  making  a  hurried 
examination  the  muzzle  may  be  applied  and  the  ends  of  the 
tape  held  by  an  assistant  as  shown  in  Figures  302  and  303. 
All  short-nosed  animals,  in  which  the  capacity  of  the  nasal 
passages  is  limited,  must  be  secured  by  this  method  with  extreme 
caution  to  avoid  suffocation.  To  remove  the  muzzle  and. release 
the  jaws,  simply  untie  the  knot  by  grasping  end  of  tape.  There 
are  several  desirable  muzzles  manufactured  and  sold,  some  of 
them  better  than  others.  A  comprehensive  idea  of  them  may  be 
obtained  by  referring  to  the  following  illustrations : 


Fig.  304.     Automatic   Muzzle   Applied. 


MUZZLES,   TAPE  AND  OTHER  METHODS. 


267 


Fig.   305.     Safety    Muzzle    Applied. 


Fig.  307.     Protection   Muzzle. 


268 


KESTRAINT    OF   DOMESTIC    ANIMALS. 


Fig.  308.      Hungarian    IVIuzzle. 


Fig.  309.     Adjustable  Leather  Muzzle. 


Fig.  310.     Collar  Nippers. 


The  collar  nippers,  Figure  310,  are  useful  for  grasping  wild 
and  vicious  dogs  by  the  neck  preparatory  to  restraining  them. 

Figure  311  represents  a  dog  held  safe  for  examination  by 
a  firm  grasp  with  one  hand  by  the  nape  of  the  neck  and  the 


MUZZLES^   TAPE   AND   OTHER   ME  TllODS. 


269 


Fig.  311.     Hobday's   Method   of   Holding   a   Dog   Safe  for   Examination. 


Fig.  312.     Safe  Method  of  Holding  a  Dog  for  Examination  or  Operation. 


270  EESTEAINT    OF   DOMESTIC    ANIMALS. 

other  hand  held  firmly  against  the  lower  jaw.     A  hold  of  this 
kind  prevents  opening  of  the  jaws. 

Another  safe  method  of  holding  a  dog,  Figure  312,  is  by 
grasping  the  fore  and  hind  legs  and  bringing  them  up  to  the 
side  of  the  jaws,  in  which  position  they  are  held  by  tight  grasp- 
ing and  firm  pressure  on  each  side  of  the  face.  In  this  position 
the  dog  is  absolutely  helpless. 


Fig.  313.     Holding  Jaws  Apart  with  Tapes. 

Figure  313  represents  the  jaws  being  held  apart  with  a 
tape  or  cord  looped  around  both  the  lower  and  upper  jaw. 

Miles'   Method   of   Restraining   the   Bitch. 

The  method  of  Miles,  Figure  31-i,  of  restraining  the  bitch 
for  "spaying"  operation  consists  of  first  applying  a  tape  muzzle 


MUZZLES^  TAPE  AND  OTHER   METHODS. 


271 


(i).  A  piece  of  small  rope  or  cord  (c)  (b)  is  then  tied  by  a 
running  noose  knot  above  each  hock  (e)  (d).  The  bitch  is  then 
hung  lip  to  nail  or  hook  (a).     Another  similar  rope  is  fixed 


Fig.  314.      Miles'   Method  of   Restraining  the  Bitch. 


around  both  fore  legs,  above  the  elbows  (f)  (h).  The  operator 
now  places  his  foot  through  loop  (g)  on  fore  legs,  which  allows 
him  to  make  sufficient  traction  to  hold  the  animal  in  an  ex- 
tended position  without  the  aid  of  an  assistant. 


PART  V. 


Restraint  of  the  Hog. 


V 


PART  V. 

Restraint  of  the  Hog. 

Little  or  no  difficulty  is  experienced  in  casting  and  securing 
young  pigs  or  small  bogs,  either  in  the  standing  or  recumbent 
positions;  but  aged  and  large  animals  are  more  difficult  and 
dangerous  to  control,  and  by  their  tusks  sometimes  inflict  severe 
lacerated  wounds. 

Some  large  hogs  are  tedious  and  difficult  to  catch,  and  when 
caught  most  of  them  are  extremely  difficult  and  unhandy  to  hold. 
This  is  largely  due  to  the  few  and  inaccessibility  of  projecting 
parts  by  which  a  firm  hand  hold  may  be  taken.  In  restraining 
or  securing  the  hog  we  have  only  two  objects  in  view,  viz.,  pro- 
tecting the  operator  and  assistants  from  bites  and  wounds  from 
the  tusks,  and  sufficient  immobilization  of  the  animal  for  exam- 
ination and  operation. 

Catching  the  Hog. 

Many  methods  have  been  suggested  whereby  the  hog  may  be 
conveniently  caught  preparatory  to  securing  for  operation.  The 
animal  may  be  seized  above  the  ankle  of  one  or  both  hind  legs, 
or  by  the  ears,  or  both,  and  thrown  on  its  side.  Food  may  be 
placed  in  a  deep  vessel  and  while  engaged  in  eating,  it  may  be 
captured.  Or  a  stiff  piece  of  cord  witli  a  loop  or  running 
noose  upon  one  end  of  it  may  be  tied  to  end  of  a  stick  and  a 
piece  of  bread  or  other  solid  food  placed  in  the  loop ;  when  the 
hog  opens  its  mouth  to  take  the  food  the  loop  is  passed  over  its 
snout  and  tightened.  Or  a  loop  may  be  placed  on  the  ground 
and  tightened  as  soon  as  the  animal  has  placed  one  of  its 
feet  into  it. 

The  mechanical  hog  catcher.  Figure  315,  is  an  excellent  de- 
vice for  catching  hogs.  It  consists  of  a  pair  of  metal  jaws 
(c)  (d)  fastened  to  the  end  of  a  long  pole  (h).  These  jaws 
are  hinged  (j)  and  arc  closed   (a)    (b)   around  the  leg  of  the 


276 


RESTEAIJSTT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


animal  by  making  firm  and  continued  traction  on  the  rope  (e) 
(g).  The  hog  can  now  be  approached  and  further  restraint 
applied. 


Fig.   315.     Mechanical    Hog    Catcher. 
d 


F.g.  316.    Hog  Catcher  Open   Ready  for  Reception  of  Animal. 

Figure  316  represents  a  hog  catcher  placed  in  the  gateway 
of  a  fence  (a)  (b).     The  lever  (c)  is  attached  in  pivot  fashion 


EESTEAINT    OF    THE    HOG. 


277 


at  bottom  bv  a  strong  nail  or  iron  pin.  The  hog  thrusts  its  head 
throngh  opening  (h)  at  which  time  the  lever  is  forced  over  (d) 
against  side  of  animal's  neck  and  locked  by  pins  through  holes 
(e)  in  top  support. 

Fig-ure  olT  represents  hog  trap  made  in  box  or  crate  fash- 
ion. The  frame  is  made  of  2x4  inch  lumber  strongly  bolted 
at  corners.  The  front  end  has  a  door  (A)  made  of  two  strong 
thick  oak  boards  with  cross  cleats  on  the  inside  at  top  and  bot- 


Fig.  317.    Hog  Trap. 


tom.     This  is  held  to  the  frame  by  two  strong  hinges,  and  when 

in  use  is  held  up  by  the  strong  iron  clamp  (F).     The  lever  is 

so  arranged  that  the  trap  can  be  set  for  small  or  large  hogs.    The 

crate  is  four  feet  two  inches  long,  two  feet  four  inches  high, 

and  one  foot  six  inches  wide,  inside  measure.     Place  the  trap 

with  rear  end  close  to  the  hog  pen  with  the  lever  thrown  back. 

^Yhen  the  hog  enters  he  will  thrust  his  head  through  the  hole 

and  you  can  then   pull  the  lever  and  hold  him.      With   two 

strong  handles  attached  to  the  sides  of  the  crate  it  makes  an 

excellent  loading  device. 
18  "     , 


278 


RESTRAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Fig.  318.    Catching  Hog  by  Corn  and  Barrel  Method — First  Position. 

Figure  318  represents  first  position  of  catching  a  hog  by 
the  corn  and  barrel  method.  An  ordinary  barrel  (b)  is  placed 
on  the  ground  in  the  horizontal  position,  with  open  end  facing 
the  hog.  Corn  or  other  food  (a)  is  scattered  on  the  ground,  and 
some  of  it  thrown  into  the  barrel.     The  hog  (c)  will  eat  up  to 


Fig.    319.     Catching    Hog    by 

Corn  and  Barrel   Method, 

Second  Position. 


Fig.    320.     Catching     Hog    by 

Corn  and  Barrel   Method, 

Third    Position. 


and  into  the  barrel,  Figure  319,  at  which  time  the  barrel  is 
quickly  raised  to  upright  position.  Figure  320,  and  the  animal 
is  caught  and  in  a  way  secured  with  head  down  and  hind  feet 
up.  It  is  impossible  for  it  to  emerge  from  the  barrel  by  its 
own  efforts  alone. 


RESTRAINT    OF    THE    HOG. 


279 


One  of  the  first  things  to  be  done  after  catching  a  hog  is  to 
apply  the  twitch,  Figure  321.  This  twitch  consists  of  a  piece 
of  wood  18  inches  in  length,  flattened  at  one  end.     The  flattened 


Fig.  321.    Hog  Twitch. 


Fig.  322.    Cliampion    Hog    Holder  Applied. 


28o 


RESTKAIIfT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


Fig.  324.    Practical  Method  of  Securing  a  Large  Hog  with 
only  One  Assistant. 


EESTKAINT    OF    THE    HOG. 


281 


end  carries  two  holes  for  passage  of  the  cord  or  chain  for  the 
loop.  This  loop  is  passed  around  either  the  upper  or  lower 
jaw,  or  around  both  jaws.  Instead  of  the  twitch,  the  Champion 
Hog  Holder,  Figure  322,  may  be  applied  to  the  upper  jaw  (b). 
This  holder  is  made  entirely  of  metal  and  by  slight  traction  by 
one  man,  with  one  hand  (f)  the  larg:est  hog  can  bo  held  per- 
fectly secure  without  assistance. 


Fig.  325.     Pig  Held  Between  the  Knees. 


Figure  323  represents  a  practical  method  of  securing  a  hog 
by  placing  a  loop  around  the  upper  jaw  back  of  the  canine  teeth, 
and  fixing  the  free  end  of  rope  or  cord  around  a  post  or  tree. 

Figure  324  represents  a  practical  method  of  securing  a  large 
hog  when  only  one  assistant  is  availal)1('.  A  heavy  rope  with 
a  loop  on  one  end  is  placed  over  the  head,  neck  and  one  leg  (a) 


282 


KESTBAINT    OF   DOMESTIC    ANIMALS. 


(b).  The  free  end  of  the  rope  is  thrown  over  a  beam  above 
the  hog.  Traction  on  this  rope  will  raise  fore  feet  of  the  hog 
off  the  gronnd  and  place  it  in  a  helpless  position. 


Fig.   326.      Pig    Held    Between 
the    Knees. 


Fig.   327.     Pig    Held   Between 
the    Knees   in   Proper   Po- 
sition  for  Administra- 
tion of   Medicine. 


Fignres  325,  326,  and  327  represent  proper  methods  of  hold- 
ing a  pig  or  light  hog  between  the  knees  for  either  examination 
or  operation. 


EESTKAINT    OF    THE    HOG. 


283 


To  secure  a  large  hog  in  the  rccmubent  position  an  assistant 
grasps  one  of  its  hind  legs.  He  rapidly  slides  his  right  knee 
toward  the  front  of  the  left  side  of  the  chest,  passes  his  left  hand 
over  the  withers,  and  by  the  combined  use  of  his  knees  and  arms, 
throws  the  animal  on  its  left  side.  The  animal  is  then  further 
secured  by  passing  a  cord,  rope  or  strap  in  figure  ''8"  fashion 
around  the  legs  above  the  ankles.  Figure  328.  If  necessary,  all 
four  legs  may  be  secured,  after  which  apply  the  twitch  or  Cham- 


Fig.  328.    Hog   Secured    Ready  for  Operation. 


]uon  Ilog  Holder,  and  the  restraint  is  complete.  Or,  instead 
of  fixing  the  legs  together,  the  animal  may  be  secured  as  in  Fig- 
ure 329,  with  a  pole  or  rail  over  the  neck  and  shoulders.  This 
pole  (c)  is  simply  thrust  through  an  opening  (b)  between  the 
rails  of  a  fence,  and  is  held  down  firmly  against  the  hog  by 
pressure  downward  (d)  on  its  free  end.  If  two  assistants  are 
available  to  seize,  cast  and  secure  a  hog  of  ordinary  size,  it 
should  be  done  as  follows :  One  assistant  seizes  a  hind  leg  above 
the  hock,  the  other  assistant  seizes  the  two  ears,  then  by  their 


284 


EESTEAINT    OF   DOMESTIC    ANIMALS. 


combined  efforts  the  animal  is  cast  on  its  side  and  kept  in  that 
position  by  placing  the  knee  on  its  neck. 


Fig.  329.     Hog  Secured  by  a  Pole  or  Rail  Over  Neck  and  Shoulders. 


Conlxcy's  Method  of  Restraining  the  Sow  for  "Spaying 
Operations." 

Procure  a  piece  of  3-8  inch  rope  (soft)  about  six  feet  long, 
tie  the  free  ends  together  forming  a  loop,  as  shown  in  Figure 
330.  ]^ext  you  will  procure  a  2xl4-inch  plank  about  12  feet 
long;  j^lace  it  on  the  floor  or  ground  as  the  case  may  be,  either 
spike  the  upper  end  fast  or  drive  a  stake  in  the  ground  belo^v, 
or  in  some  manner  make  the  plank  secure  (D).  Now  make 
your  rope  fast  to  the  upper  end  of  the  plank  wdth  a  spike  (B), 
or  by  boring  a  hole  through  the  plank  large  enough  to  allow  the 
rope  to  be  drawn  up  through,  when  it  will  be  secured  by  a  large 
knot  in  its  ends.  This  should  be  so  arranged  that  when  the 
hog  is  fastened  to  the  plank  she  will  be  about  waist  high,  as  indi- 
cated in  the  following  illustrations: 


RESTRAINT    OF    THE    HOG. 


285 


Fig.  330.     Conkey's  Method  of  Restraining  the  Sow  for  "Spaying 
Operation" — First  Step. 


Fig.   331.     Conkey's   Method   of    Restraining   the   Sow  for  "Spaying 
Operation" — Second  Step, 


286 


EESTEAINT    OF   DOMESTIC   ANIMALS. 


The  operator  will  stand  facing  the  plank,  with  his  right  hand 
toward  the  low  end  of  the  plank;  pass  yonr  right  hand  (a) 
through  the  looped  rope,  and  instruct  your  assistant  to  grasp 
both  right  legs  of  the  hog  and  bring  it  to  you,  placing  it  on  the 
board.  As  he  approaches  pass  your  left  hand  under  your  right 
hand  and  the  rope,  grasping  the  left  hind  leg,  while  your  right 
hand  grasps  the  7'ight  hind  leg;  now  guide  the  left- leg  to  your 


Fig.  332.     Conkey's  Method  of  Restraining  a  Sow  for  "Spaying 
Operation" — Animal  Secured. 


right  hand,  which  grasps  it.  The  right  hand  now  retains  both 
hind  legs,  Figure  331,  while  your  left  hand  grasps  the  loop 
from  over  your  wrist  and  carries  it  back,  dropping  it  posterior 
to  the  hind  feet.  As  you  drop  the  rope  back  of  the  feet  you 
are  to  say  "pull" — meaning  that  your  assistant  is  to  pull  the  hog 
downward  on  the  plank,  making  the  rope  taut,  as  is  shown  in 
Figure  332. 

With  a  little  practice  a  sow  can  be  secured,  by  this  method, 
in  less  than  five  seconds. 


INDEX 


INDEX 


A 

PAGE 

Abilgaard's  Modification  of  Danish  Casting  and  Securing  Har- 
ness  125,  126 

Accidents  to  Horse  in  Use  of  Operating  Table IGl 

Adjustable  Dog  Muzzle    268 

American  Xose  Clamp 221 

American  Xose  Clamp,  with  Rope   221 

American    Sling    66 

Anti-Kicker — Smith's 230 

Australian    "Crush"     63,  64 

Author's  Knee-Strap 28,  112,  227 

Automatic  Dog  Muzzle   266 

B 

Barcus'   Stocks 52,  55 

Barnacles    19,  20 

Metal 20 

Wooden 19 

Barnick's  Loop  Hobbles 84 

Becker's  Hobbles   81 

Belmont   Rider    Hippo-Lasso    50 

Berlin  Hobbles    88,  89 

Bernardot  and  Buttel  Apparatus 75,  76,  95 

Bernard's  Operating  Table   253 

Blindfold 21 

Bradwood   Operating   Table   and   Chair    198-215 

Broken  Back,  Apparatus  for  Prevention  of 75,  76,  95 

"Broncho,"   Restraint  of    153,  154 

c 

Casting  and  Securing  Harness  and  Ropes 109-256 

Casting  and  Securing  Harness,  Conkey's  113-116 

Cowie's 139,  140 

Cowie's  as  modified  by  Lewis   1-iO 


290  INDEX. 

PAGE 

Casting  and  Securing  Harness — Continued. 

Danish 122-126 

Dollar's   Double    Side    130,  131 

Double  Side  Line 135,  136 

Hayes'    129 

Hulburt's   '. 120,  121 

Knowles' 117,  118,  119,  245,  246 

Lernberg 131,  132 

McDonald's     132,  133 

Miles'    (Ridgling)    137-139 

Over's •  • 133,  134 

Rohard's    126-128 

Russian 134,  13& 

Whitwell's     119,  120 

Ziegler's 121,  122 

Casting  and  Securing  the  Horse,  One  Man  Method  of 141-152 

Galvayne's 144-146 

Gleason's  146-148 

M'agner's 148-151 

Rarey's     152 

Russian    141-143 

Casting  and  Securing  Horse  with  Hobbles,  Directions  for 82 

Casting  and  Securing  the  Ox 238-246 

With  Conkey's   Self-Locking  Buckle  Hobbles    241 

With  Double  Side  Line 245 

With  Knowles'  Web  Casting  Harness 245,  246 

With   Rope  Fixed  to   Horns    243 

With  Rope  on  Three  Legs   243 

Rueff's  Method  of 239 

Soffner's   Method    240 

Calves,  Casting  and  Securing  for  '"Spaying"   240 

Catching  the  Dog  with  Collar  Nippers 268 

Catching  the  Hog   275-278 

With  Corn  and  Barrel 278 

With  Mechanical  Catcher 276 

With   Trap    277 

Champion    Hog    Holder 279 

Chicago  Veterinary  College  Operating  Table 185-188 

"Chute"  for  Cattle  237 

Clove  Hitch — Dog  Muzzle  Made  by 265 

Collar  Nippers 268 

Conkey's   Operating  Table    188,  189 

Conkey's  Method  of  Securing  the  "Sow 285,  286 

Conkey's  Self-Locking  Buckle  Hobbles   86,  87,  241 


INDEX. 


291 


PAGE 

Controlling  Apparatus  for  Ox,  Vigan's 223 

Cowie's  Casting  and  Securing  Harness   139,  140 

Cozler's  Operating  Table 164-16G 

Cross  Hobbles  77 

Crush,  The  Australian 63,  64 

D 

Danish  Casting  and  Securing  Harness   ; ;.;...;;   122-126 

Daviau's  Operating  Table   161 

Improved 162,  163 

Dawson-French  Dog  Hobbles   " 250 

Delahanty's  Operating  Table   259,  260 

Denenbourg's  Improvised  Rope  Hobble 78 

Dental  Halters   25-27 

Ellis' 27 

Fehr's 27 

Lucas' 25 

Directions  for  Casting  and  Securing  Horse  with  Hobbles 82 

Releasing  Horse  from  Hobbles   83 

Dog  Hobbles 250-253 

Dawson-French    250 

Hobday's    251 

Improvised  Cord  Loop    252 

Key 253 

Dog.  Holding  Safe  for  Examination  and  Operation  269 

Dog  Muzzles 265-268' 

Adjustable    268 

Automatic 266 

Clove  Hitch    265 

Hungarian 268 

Leather  Box    267 

Leather  Strap 265 

Protection     267 

Safety     267 

Tape 265 

Dog  Operating  Tables   250-264 

Bernard's 253 

Delahanty's    259,  260 

German .257,  258 

German,  All  Metal   261,  262 

Hobday's 255,  256 

Improvised    263,  264 

Italian    258.  259 


292  INDEX. 

PAGE 

Dog  Operating  Tables — Continued. 

Livon's   256,  257 

MacQueen's    254,  255 

Metal,  with  Enamel  Finish 255 

Stuttgart     262,  263 

White's 257 

Dog,  Restraint  of  the   249-271 

By  Holding 269 

By  Holding  Jaws  Apart  with  Tape  270 

Miles'  Method   270,  271 

Operating  Tables    250-264 

Dollar's  Method  of  Casting  and  Securing  with  Double  Side  Line. 130,  131 

Drawing  Hind  Leg  Forward   101 

Securing  Fore  and  Hind  Legs  Together 112 

Securing  Hind  Leg  to  Fore  Leg  on  Same  Side 103 

Securing  Lower  Hind  to  Upper  Fore  Leg  104,  105 

Double  Side  Line,  Casting  by 135,  136 

Drawback  or  Pulley  Harness  241 

E 

Ellis'  Combination  Dental  and  Surgical  Halter 27 

English  Cross  Hobbles 93,  96,  107 

Hobbles 77 

Nose  Clamp  Modified   222 

Nose  Clamp  Modified  with  Metal  Keeper 222 

Ewell  Farm  Service  Hobbles    41 

Extension  Grate 253,  254 

F 

Fehr's  Dental  Halter 26 

French  Sling 70 

G 

Gags    17  19 

Loop  and  Rope 18 

Rope  and  Long  Stick   19 

Rope  and  Short  Stick  IS 

Galvayne's  One  Man  Method  of  Casting  and  Securing  a  Horse.'  144-146 
Galvayne's  One  Man  Method  of  Casting  and  Securing  Wild  and 
Vicious  Horses   155-156 


INDEX. 


293 


PACE 

Galvayne's  Method  of  Restraining  All  Four  Legs 4G 

Straight  Jacket 47 

German  Apparatus  for  Restraining  All  Four  Legs 39 

Metal  Operating  Table 2G1,  262 

M'ethod  of  Restraining  One  Hind  Leg   36 

Nose  Clamp   222 

Operating  Table  for  Dog ,257,  258 

Operating  Table  for  Horse    195-197 

Sling    68 

Gleason's  Hippo-Lasso 51 

One  Man  Method  of  Casting  and  Securing  a  Horse 146-148 

War  Bridle 23 

Grate — Extension  for  Dogs  253,  254 


H 


H.    &   D.    Sling 66 

Halters,  Restraint  and   Dental    25-27 

Hayes'  Improvised  Casting  Ropes  129 

Head,  Restraint  of  Ox 220-225 

To  Post   .^ 224 

With  Leavitt's  Holder 225 

With  Rope    225 

Hess'  Knee  Strap 30,  112,  227 

Method  of  Restraining  Both  Hind  Legs  of  Ox 231 

Method  of  Restraining  One  Fore  and  One  Hind  Leg  of  Ox.  234 

Method  of  Restraining  One  Hind  Leg  of  Ox 228,  229 

Hippo-Lasso 47-51 

Belmont   Rider    ' 50 

Galvayne's 47 

Gleason's    51 

Raabe's  and  Lunel's 48 

Hobbles  for  Dog  250-253 

Dawson-French •  •  250 

Hobday's    251 

Improvised    Loop 252 

Key    253 

Hobbles  for  Horse .  •  ■  78-108 

Barnick's    Loop     84 

Becker's    81 

Berlin 88 

Conkey's  Lock  Buckle 86,  87 

Cross '^'^ 

'9 


29+  INDEX. 

PAGE 

Hobbles  for  Horse — Continued. 

English 93-98 

James'    83 

Leather   Loop    80 

Matthias 85 

Miles'  Rope    80 

Munich     85 

Over's    Spring 81 

Plaited  Raw-Hide  Loop    80 

Rope,  Improvised   78 

Service  or  Anti-Kicking 39-41 

Side  Bar   77 

Stuttgart 89-92 

Suykerbuyck's  Rope    79 

Hobday's  Hobbles    251 

Method  of  Holding  Dog  269 

Operating  Table 255,  256 

Hock  Joint  Fixing  Apparatus   Ill 

Twitch 31,  111,  228 

Hodgson  &  Magee's  Operating  Table 166-169 

Hog,  Catching  the 275-278 

By  Corn  and  Barrel   278 

By   Trap 276,  277 

By  M'echanical  Catcher   276 

Hog,  Champion  Holder  for  the   279 

Hog,    Restraint    of    the 275-286 

By  Conkey's  Method  285,  286 

By  Holding  Between  Knees   281,  282 

By  a  Practical  Method  280 

By  Pole  or  Rail  Over  Neck 284 

Hog  Trap    277 

Hog  Twitch 279 

Hood,  Operating  74 

Horse,  Casting  with  Hobbles 78-108 

With  Ropes  and  Harness 109-156 

Directions  for  Casting  with  Hobbles 82 

Directions  for  Releasing  Horse  from  Hobbles  83 

Operating  Tables  for  the  157-215 

Special  Positions  when  Cast 99-108 

Restraint  of  in  Recumbent  Posture  78-215 

Restraint  of  in  Standing  Posture 13-70 

Restraint  of  Wild  and  Vicious  153-156 

Hulburt's  Casting  and  Securing  Harness .120,  121 

Hungarian  Dog  Muzzle 268 


INDEX.  2^5 

I 

PACE 

Improvised  Casting  Ropes  (Hayes) 129 

Cord  Loop  Hobbles   _  .  .  252 

Operating    Table    263,  2G4 

Italian  Nose  Clamp   _ 223 

Operating  Table   25S,  259 

Improved   English    Hobbles 93-96 


James'  Cross  Hobbles    77 

Patent  Hobbles 83 

K 

Kansas  City  Veterinary  College  Operating  Table 197,  198 

Key  Hobbles 253 

Knee  Straps    28,  31,  111-113,  227 

Author's 28,  112,  227 

Hess' 30,  112,  227 

Magner's 31,  113 

Trasbot's    29,  112,  227 

Knots  Used  in  Restraint  Technique 109,  110 

Knowles'  Web  Casting  and  Securing  Harness    117-119,  245,  246 

Krolokowski's  Lernberg  Casting  Ropes   131,  132 

Kyle  Brother's  Operating  Table 190-194 


Leather  Box  Dog  Muzzle    267 

■  Strap  Dog  Muzzle 267 

Loop  Hobbles SO 

Leavitt's  Head  Holder   225 

Lernberg  Casting  Ropes '• 131,  132 

Lewis'  Modification  of  Cowie's  Casting  Harness  140 

Liautard's  Method  of  Drawing  Hind  Leg  Forward  102 

Method  of  Securing  Hind  Leg  to  Fore  Leg  on  Same  Side. .  104 

Securing  Off  Fore  to  Off  Hind  Leg  105 

Livon's  Operating  Table 256,  257 

Lucas'  Dental  Halter    2S 


296  -     INDEX. 

M 

PAGE 

MacQueen's  Operating  Table   254,  255 

Magner's  Knee  Strap 31,  1?  3 

Leather  Casting  Rig  148 

Rope   Casting  Rig    149 

One  Man  Metliod  of  Casting  and  Securing  a  Horse.  .......  148-151 

War  Bridle   24 

War  Bridle  Modified 25 

Marsch's  'Sling    69 

Matthias'  Hobbles  with  Safety  Lock 85 

Modification  of  Danish  Casting  Harness   124 

McDonald's  Casting  Ropes 132,  133 

McKillip  Veterinary  College  Stocks    55-59 

Merillat's  Single  Side   Line    35 

Miles'  Method  of  Securing  the  Dog 270 

Method  of  Securing  "Ridglings"   137-139  • 

Rope  Hobbles 80,  97-99 

Mohler's  Method  of  Securing  All  Four  Legs  45 

Method  of  Securing  Near  Fore  Arm  to  Near  Thigh 100 

Method  of  Securing  Off  Hind  to  Plank  and  Near  Fore  and 

Near  Hind  Legs  to  Each  Other 100 

Munich    Hobbles    85 

Muzzles,  Dog 265-268 

Adjustable     268 

Automatic 266 

Clove  Hitch 265 

Hungarian     268 

Leather    Box 267 

Leather  Strap    265 

Protection 267 

Safety     267 

Tape   265 


N 


New  York  State  Veterinary  College  Operating  Table 169-185 

Stocks     61-i63 

Nippers— Collar 268 

Nose  Clamps   221-223 

American 221 

American,  with  Rope 221 

English,  Modified 222 

English,  Modified,  with  Metal  Keeper •. . .  222 


INDEX. 


297 


Xose  Clamps — Continued. 

German 222 

Italian    223 

With  Spring  and  Keeper 222 


o 


One  Man  Method  of  Casting  and  Securing  the  Horse 141-152 

Galvayne's    144-146 

Gleason's 14G-148 

Magner's    14S-151 

Rarej^'s 152 

Russian 141-143 

Operating  Hood 74 

Operating  Table  for  Dog 250-2G4 

Bernard's     253 

Delahanty's    259,  260 

German    257,  258 

German,  All  Metal 261,  262 

Hobday's 255,  256 

Improvised    263,  264 

Italian     ■. 258,  259 

Livon's    256,  257 

MacQueen's 254,  255 

Metal,  Enamel  Finish 255 

Stuttgart    262,  263 

White's   257 

Operating  Tables  for  Horse   157-215 

Bradwood    198-215 

Chicago  Veterinary   College 185-188 

Conkey's     " 188,  189 

Cozier's     1  .164-166 

Daviau's ■  ■  ■  161 

Daviau's    Improved    162,  163 

German 195-197 

Hodgson  and  Magee's •  •   166-169 

Kansas  City  Veterinary  College 197,  198 

Kyle  Bros 190-194 

iNew  York  State  Veterinary  College  169-185 

Price's    190 

Operating  Trough — Young's    253 

Over's  Double  Side  Line  Casting  Ropes 133.  134 

Spring   Hobbles    SI 


298  INDEX. 

PAGE 

Ox — Restraint  of  the 219-246 

In  Recumbent  Posture   238-246 

By  Conkey's  Hobbles 241 

By  Double  Side  Line 245 

By  "Pulley  Harness"    241 

By  Knowles'  Harness   245,  246 

By  Rope  Fixed  to  Horns  243 

By  Rope  on  Three  Legs ^ 243 

By  Rueff's  ^ethod  ..  .k .* 239 

By  Soffner's  Method   240 

Ox — Restraint  of,  in  Standing  Posture 220-237 

All   Four   Legs    235-237 

All  Four  Legs  by  "Chute"   237 

All  Four  Legs  by  Stocks 236 

Head    .' 220-225 

With  Leavitt's  Holder    225 

With  Hold  in  Nose 220 

With  Nose  Clamps    221-223 

With  Rope    225 

With  Rope  to  Post 224 

With  Vigan's  Apparatus 223 

Both  Fore  Legs .  226,  227 

Both  Fore  Legs  by  Knee  Straps  227 

Both  Hind  Legs 230-233 

Both  Hind  Legs  by  Hess'  Method   231 

Both  Hind  Legs  by  Pole 231-233 

Both  Hind  Legs  by  Plank   233 

Both  Hind  Legs  by  Rope .'*. 230 

Both  Hind  Legs  by  Sack  or  Cloth 231,  232 

Both  Hind  Legs  by  Smith's  Anti-Kicker 230 

One  Fore  and  One  Hind  Leg  234,  235 

One  Fore  and  One  Hind  Leg  by  Hess'  Method. 235 

One  Hind  Leg  227-229 

One  Hind' Leg  by  Hess'  Method 228,  229 

Hock  Twitch    228 


Patent  Hobbles — James'    83 

Peterson's  Hock  Joint  Flexing  and  Fixing  Apparatus Ill 

Peuch  &  Toussaint's   Stocks 63 

Pfeiffer's  Modification  of  Danish  Casting  Harness 124,  125 

Plaited  Rawhide  Loop  Hobbles   80 


INDEX.  299 

PAGE 

Plate    Longe    43,  89,  91,  95 

Practical  Method  of  Restraining  Hog 280 

Price's   Operating  Table    190 

Protection  Dog   Muzzle    2G7 


R 


Raabe  &  Lunel's  Hippo-Lasso 48 

Rarey's  One  Man  Method  of  Casting  a  Horse 152 

Recumbent  Posture — Horse  in   7S  215 

Ox  in 23S-246 

Releasing  a  Horse  from  Hobbles — Directions  for 83 

Restraint  of  "Broncho"    I'ltJ-lSG 

Restraint  and  Dental  Halters 25-27 

Restraint  of  Dog 249-271 

By   Hobbles    250-253 

By   Holding 269 

By  Miles'  Method  270-271 

By    Muzzles    265-268 

By  Operating  Tables 250-264 

Restraint  of  Hog 275-286 

By   Conkey's   Method    285.  286 

By  Holding  Between  Knees    281,  282 

By  Pole  or  Rail  Over  Neck  and  Shoulders 284 

By  Practical  Method  280 

For    Operation    283 

Restraint  of  Horse 13-215 

In  Recumbent  Posture   78-215 

Casting  and  Securing  Harness  and  Ropes.. 109-256 

Cross   Hobbles ^^ 

Hobbles    78-108 

One  Man  Method  of 141-152 

Operating  Tables 157-215 

Restraint  of  Horse  in  Standing  Posture  13-70 

All  Four  Legs  by  Galvayne's  Method   -46 

All  Four  Legs  by  Hippo-Lasso -l^-^l 

By  Morgan's  Method  ^^ 

By  Rope    _    '^^ 

By  Stocks   ^-'^^ 

By  Web   and  Rope    •  • ■*- 

Both  Hind  Legs   ^^'-^l 

Both  Hind  Legs  by  Ewell  Farm  Service  Hobbles 4i 

Both  Hind  Legs  by  German  Apparatus 39 


300  INDEX. 

PAGE 

Restraint  of  Horse  in  Standing  Posture — Continued. 

By  Ropes    42 

By  Wocher's  Service  Hobbles 40 

One  Fore  Leg  by  Knee  Straps 28-31 

One  Hind  Leg  31-38 

One  Hind  Leg  by  German  Method 36 

One  Hind  Leg  Merillat's  Single  Side  Line 35 

One  Hind  Leg  by  Rope  to  Tail    32 

One  Hind  Leg  by  Side  Line 33 

One  Hind  Leg  by  Surcingle  and  Rope    34 

Restraint — Knots  Used  in 109,  110 

Restraint  of  Ox    229-246 

In   Recumbent   Posture 238-246 

By    Conkey's    Hobbles    241 

With  Drawback  or  "Pulley  Harness"  241 

With  Double  'Side  Line 245 

With  Knowles'  Web  Casting  Harness  245,  246 

With  Rope  Fixed  to  Three  Legs  243 

With  Rope  Fixed  to  Horns 243 

Reuff's  Method    239 

Soffner's   Method 240 

Restraint  of  Ox  in  Standing  Posture   220-237 

"Cattle   Chute" 237 

By  Hand  Held  on   Xose    220 

By  Hess'  Method 228-231 

By  Hock  Twitch 228 

By  iNose  Clamps   221-223 

By   Plank    233 

By  Pole    . 231,  233 

By  Rope  Tie    230 

By  Sack  or  Cloth  231,  232 

By  Smith's  Anti-Kicker 230 

By  Stocks   236 

Rope  Method  of  Restraining  All  Four  Legs   45 

Both  Hind  Legs    42 

One   Fore    Leg    29,  30 

One  Hind  Leg 32-37 

Rope  Hobbles,  Denenbourg's    78 

Miles' 80,  97,  98,  99 

Suykerbuyck's 79 

Rohard's  Method  of  Casting  With  Ropes 126-128 

Russian  Method  of  Casting  With  Ropes   134,  135 

One  Man  Method  of  Casting  a  Horse  141-143 


INDEX.  301 

s 

PAHE 

Safety  Lock  Hobbles,  Matthias'   85 

Self-Locking  Buckle  Hobbles — Conkey's 87 

Service   Hobbles — Ewell   Farm    41 

vVocher's     39 

Side   Bar   Hobbles    77 

Slings 65-70 

American     66 

French 70 

German    68 

.       H.  &  D 65 

Marsch's    69 

Smith's    Anti-Kicker 230 

Soffner's  Method  of  Casting  the  Ox  240 

Special  Positions  of  Horse  when  Cast  with  Hobbles 99-108 

Standing  Posture — Restraint  of  Horse  in 13-70 

Restraint  of  Ox   in 220-237 

Stocks   52-63,  236 

Barcus' 52-55 

McKillip  Veterinary  College    55-59 

Xew  York  State  Veterinary  College 61-63 

Peuch's  &  Toussaint's 63 

Vinsot's    59,  60 

Wooden 59 

Stuttgart  Method  of  Casting 89-93 

Subjection  of  Horse  by  Barnacles 19,  20 

By    Blindfold 21 

By  Gags 17-19 

By  Galvayne's  "Straight  .Jacket"   47 

By  Operating   Hood 74 

By   Twitch    13-17 

By  War  Bridle   22-25 

Subjection  of  Ox  by  Hand  Hold  220 

By  Nose   Clamps    221-223 

By  Vigan's  Apparatus    223 

Surcingle  and  Strap   29,  30 

Suykerbuyck's   Rope   Hobbles    79 


Tables— Operating,  for  Dog 250-264 

For  Horse  157-215 

Tail  Knot  for  Restraining  Hind  Leg  32 


302  INDEX. 

PAGE 

Tape — Dog    Muzzle    265 

M'ethod  of  Holding  Jaws  Apart  270 

Trasbot's  Knee  Strap    29,  112,  227 

Trap  for  Hog    277 

Trough — Young's  Operating  253 

Twitch — Ball  and  Chain iq 

Hock     31 

Hog  279 

Iron   and   Chain 17 

Miles'    15,  16 

Ring    14 

Rope  and   Stick    14 

Rope  and  Stick  with  Metal-bound  Head  16 

Rope  Loop  and  Short  "Stick  17 

Triangular    14,  15 

Wooden    13 

Twitches,  Gags  and  Barnacles 13-20 

V 

Vienna  Method  of  Restraint  in  Dorsal  Position  106,  107 

Vigan's  Apparatus 223 

Vinsot's    Stocks    59,  60 

Von  Chelchowski's  Method  of  Casting 92 

w 

War  Bridles   22-25 

Web  and  Rope  Apparatus  43 

Web — Knowles'  Harness    117-119,  245,  246 

White's  Operating  Table  257 

Whitwell's  Casting  and  Securing  Harness 119,  120 

Wocher's  Service  Hobbles 40 

Wild  and  Vicious  Horses — Restraint  of  153-156 

Wooden    Stocks    59 

Y 

Young's  Operating  Trough   253 

z 

Ziegler's  Casting  and  Securing  Harness 221,  222 


Webster  Family  Library  of  Veterinary  Medicine 
Cummings  School  of  Veterinary  Medicine  at 
Tufts  University 
200  VVestboro  Road 
North  Grafton,  MA  01536 


f  0/ 


i 


